Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
V300R008C00
User Guide
Issue 01
Date 2012-08-10
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
This document provides the guides for installing and using the GENEX U-Net.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document is network plan engineers.
Change History
01 (2012-08-10)
This is the first release of V300R008C00.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes.
Content Description
1.3 Main Window of the U-Net The content descriptions are changed.
Content Description
Organization
1 Introduction to the U-Net
The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks.
It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network.
For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology and
UMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTE-
FDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to complete
the initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization.
2 Installing the U-Net Software
This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the U-
Net, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by
the installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then you
can use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstall
it.
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as the
neighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, and
evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements.
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actual
network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating
base stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parameters
and predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements on
network planning in different scenarios.
5 GSM Network Planning
The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell
parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your
network planning requirements.
6 UMTS Network Planning
The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells and
scrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to
meet you network planning requirements.
7 CDMA Network Planning
This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supports
only the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes.
The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on the
hybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTS
network coverage range to meet your network planning requirements.
9 FAQ
This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net.
The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zooming
in or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display.
This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Convention Description
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
Contents
9 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................545
9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net............................................................547
9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website............547
9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area......................................................................548
9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007
..............................................................................................................................................................................550
9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains
Chinese Characters...............................................................................................................................................551
9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly...........................................................................................553
9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly
..............................................................................................................................................................................554
9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System....................................................555
9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure......................................555
The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks.
It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network.
For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology and
UMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTE-
FDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to complete
the initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization.
1.1 Overview
The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographic
information system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently plan
the network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage,
capacity, and quality.
1.2 System Structure
The U-Net provides a series of functions such as the Geographic Information System (GIS),
service modeling, NE modeling, propagation modeling, prediction, capacity simulation,
parameter planning, and analysis result output.
1.3 Main Window of the U-Net
This section describes the main window of the U-Net, including the menu bar, toolbar, explorer
window, operation GUIs, and entries to related operations using the U-Net when the LTE-FDD
network system is selected.
1.1 Overview
The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographic
information system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently plan
the network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage,
capacity, and quality.
Positioning
Figure 1-1 shows the position of the U-Net on the network.
Entity Description
Product Features
The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, a flexible software architecture,
an advanced geographic information system (GIS), rich data resources, and user-friendly GUIs.
These features enable network planning engineers to improve the work efficiency significantly.
l Advanced LTE planning simulation technology
The U-Net supports the planning of neighboring cells, frequency, Physical Cell ID (PCI)
codes, and Physical Random Access Channels (PRACHs). In addition, it provides
professional LTE network optimization by incorporating the rich experience and advanced
technologies of both Huawei and leading operators.
l Advanced planning algorithms
The U-Net helps users flexibly perform co-planning of GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD
networks, thus appropriately making use of existing site resources. This accelerates the
product delivery and shortens the network deployment period.
l Advanced semi-dynamic simulation technology
By providing high-accuracy network prediction, the U-Net helps to accurately estimate
network investment and provide a low-cost solution, thus effectively reducing the overall
costs of network deployment.
l Powerful and easy-to-use network planning function
The U-Net provides mature algorithms for inter-RAT neighboring cell planning and easy
settings of planning parameters. This improves work efficiency effectively by reducing the
technical requirements on network optimization and ensures the quality of network
planning.
Application Scenario
The U-Net is applicable in network deployment, network optimization, and network expansion.
During the network deployment, the U-Net helps you to properly plan the engineering
parameters, neighboring cell data, and frequency data of the network, thus providing guidance
for the actual project implementation. During the optimization and expansion of the network,
the U-Net helps you to optimize the network parameters and verify the optimization by
comparing the network performance before and after the optimization.
Table 1-1 describes the functions provided by the U-Net.
Site After the area for deploying a site is specified, the site can be quickly
deployment deployed on the map by using the base station template. By performing point
analysis, the U-Net can analyze the altitude height and clutter height along
the profile of the propagation path to adjust the site deployment.
Network The U-Net helps users plan configuration parameters of the network, such
parameter as parameters related to the neighboring cells, frequency, PCIs, PRACHs,
planning and TAs.
Prediction The U-Net starts the prediction after importing the map and configuring
network data, service model, and propagation model. By analyzing the
prediction result, it evaluates the network performance.
Function Description
Capacity After the traffic parameters are configured and the traffic map is set
simulation according to the planning, the U-Net performs the simulation calculation
based on the traffic map. In capacity simulation, the U-Net analyzes the
throughput of the cell and the user. In addition, it analyzes the coverage of
common channels and traffic channels based on the specific network load
provided in the simulation calculation results.
Interaction You can obtain configuration parameters from the CME and then import
with the CME them to the U-Net for prediction and analysis. The analysis results provided
by the U-Net can be imported to the CME and then be delivered to the
network.
l Platform
This part provides the data management function and the basic common functions, such as
project management, GIS, NE modeling, service modeling, and propagation modeling. The
U-Net manages all the platform functions by using the project management function. In
addition, the project management function provides interfaces to support service functions
of different network systems.
l System application
This part provides service functions for the actual network system, including parameter
planning, capacity simulation, prediction, and result analysis. The parameter planning
mainly involves the planning of neighboring cells, PCIs, frequency and PRACHs.
Figure 1-3 shows the main window after you start the U-Net. Table 1-2 lists the items in the
main window.
1 Menu bar Provides the main menu of the system. For details, see Menu
Bar.
2 Standard toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related to
projects. For details, see Standard Toolbar.
3 Task toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related to
tasks. For details, see Task Toolbar.
4 Explorer window Provides the entries to main operations using a navigation tree.
For details, see Explorer Window.
5 Event window Displays the information about the progress of operation tasks
when the U-Net is running.
7 System status bar Displays the information about the system status.
Menu Bar
The menu bar of the U-Net provides the main menu of the system, which is organized based on
the main functions of the U-Net to facilitate your operations.
Table 1-3 describes the menu bar of the U-Net and the corresponding functions.
Edit Provides entries for viewing analysis GUIs. For details, see
Table 1-5.
Import Excel Import existing planning data, such as base station data and
propagation model data.
Recent File View the names of the five projects that are opened recently.
This menu item provides shortcut operation entries to the five
projects.
Standard Toolbar
You can click an icon on the standard toolbar to perform the corresponding project-related
operation quickly.
Figure 1-4 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 1-8 describes the icons shown in
Figure 1-4.
NOTE
You can choose Window > Standard Toolbar and determine whether to display the standard toolbar.
Create a project.
Open a project.
Save a project.
Task Toolbar
You can click an icon on the task toolbar to quickly perform the operations related to the map
and point analysis.
Figure 1-5 shows the icons on the task toolbar. Table 1-9 describes the icons shown in Figure
1-5.
Icon Description
Create a repeater.
Move a map.
Select a scaling.
Draw a polygon.
Draw a line.
Draw a point.
Combine polygons.
Explorer Window
The Explorer window is in the left pane the main window. The Explorer window has four tab
pages: GEO, Data, Network, and Operation.
NOTE
In normal cases, if you select or clear the check box of a node in the navigation tree, the information about the
node is displayed or hidden accordingly in the GIS window. For example, if you select the check box of
This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the U-
Net, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by
the installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then you
can use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstall
it.
Hardware Requirements
Table 2-1 lists the hardware requirements of the PC.
Memor 2 GB 512 MB
y
Software Requirements
Table 2-2 lists the software requirements of the PC.
Prerequisites
NOTE
l The U-Net installation program is ready. The PC meets the installation requirements. For details, see 2.1
Preparation for the Installation.
l You have logged in to the operating system by using an administrator account because the U-Net software
must be installed by using an administrator account.
Context
The support website of Huawei provides the U-Net installation package. The installation
package is classified into four types.
l If you use a 32-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet32 (exclude framework).
Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet32.
l If you use a 64-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet64 (exclude framework).
Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet64.
Before installing the U-Net main program, you are advised to close all the running programs to
ensure successful installation of the U-Net main program.
This section takes a 32-bit operating system as an example to describe the installation procedure
of the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 1 Download the installation package at the support website of Huawei.
Read the background information carefully and download the correct installation package.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, select I accept the terms of the License Agreement.
Step 6 In the user information dialog box, enter the User Name and Company Name.
Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, select the required feature components.
Step 10 In the displayed dialog box, click Browse to set the installation path.
Display the Installer setup wizard Follow the prompts to install the software.
After the installation is complete, it is recommended that
you restart the PC. Then, perform Step 13 to check
whether the U-Net is installed successfully.
Display the .NET Framework Follow the prompts to install the software.
setup wizard
Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei GENEX > U-Net 3.8 to check whether the information
about the U-Net software exists.
If... Then...
The U-Net software information exists The U-Net main program is successfully
installed.
The U-Net software information does not Repeat Step 1 through Step 13 until the U-Net
exist main program is successfully installed.
Table 2-3 describes the structure of the U-Net installation folder generated after the U-Net main
program is installed.
iScript Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine
(JVM).
RuleStore Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine
(JVM).
----End
Procedure
l Apply for a license for yourself.
1. In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for self. The Domain
Authentication dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.
If the entered domain account is valid, the U-Net will automatically update the license.
4. After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net.
l Apply for a license for others.
1. In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for others. The Off-
line License Application dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.
2. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters. Table 2-4 describes the parameters.
Set the save path of License file Save path of the license file.
3. Click Next.
4. Enter the domain account information in the displayed Domain Authentication
dialog box.
5. Click OK.
6. After domain authentication succeeds, click Submit.
NOTE
After the license application succeeds, the U-Net automatically saves the license file to a
specified local path.
7. Update a license locally.
a. In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Update License. The Update
License dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3.
b. Click Browse, and choose the save path of the license file.
c. Click Update License.
8. After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After loading the license, restart the U-Net and choose Help > About License to view the
remaining valid days of the license.
Prerequisites
When the U-Net is running, the read and write operations are performed on the U-Net installation
directory. Therefore, you must have complete read and write rights to the installation directory
before starting the U-Net.
Select the folder where the installation directory resides, right-click, and then choose
Properties from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, view the permission information
on the Security tab page.
Procedure
l Double-click the U-Net 3.8 shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U-Net software.
Alternatively, you can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or by double-
clicking U-Net software installation path/Huawei.UNet.exe.
An incorrect license file is loaded A message is displayed, indicating that the license
file is incorrect. Obtain the correct license file and
then load the license file. For details, see 2.3
Installing a License.
After loading the license file, restart the U-Net.
----End
Context
The license file, log files, temporary files, and saved U-Net project files are retained when the
U-Net is being uninstalled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Control Panel window, double-click Add or Remove Programs.
Step 2 Select U-Net 3.8.
Step 3 Click Uninstall/Change. The interface for uninstalling the U-Net main program is displayed.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select Remove, and click Next >. Then, click Uninstall.
Step 5 After the U-Net main program is successfully uninstalled, click Finish.
You can restart the PC as required.
----End
The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as the
neighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, and
evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements.
Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic
parameters are defined before capacity prediction.
3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template
to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters
separately.
3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction
By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and
channel quality.
3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation
Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as
follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and
allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall
network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net
generates a statistical report.
3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters
You can plan the neighboring cells, EARFCNs, PCIs, and PRACHs of an LTE-FDD network
through the U-Net.
4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,
or site equipment.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
6 Setting NE You can import existing base station data to create base
parameters stations or use a base station template to automatically
create base stations. You can also create sites,
transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 3.7
Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters.
7 Calculating the path For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
loss
10 Creating a traffic For details, see 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps.
map
Context
l Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
l One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Save a project file.
Choose File > Save or click to save all the information about the project in a project
file.
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l Open an existing project file.
Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.
NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Geographic Data
The U-Net uses two types of geographic data for planning and analysis, that is, Digital Elevation
Model (DEM) data and Digital Terrain Model (DTM) data. Currently, the U-Net can import
geographic data files in Planet, Shape, MIF, or Vertical Mapper format.
The two types of geographic data are described as follows:
l DEM data:
It is the data about the ground elevation, including the plane coordinates and the value of
the ground elevation.
l DTM data:
It is the data about the altitude, including the plane coordinates and the value of the altitude.
The DTM data is similar to the DEM data. The difference is that the DEM data represents the
above-the-sea height, including the terrain height and the clutter height, whereas the DTM data
represents only the terrain height.
Table 3-2 Relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types
Planet File Layer Type Description
Type
Point Layer File Text Layer (Point Point layer files save the identification data of each
Layer) typical land mark (such as a town).
Point layer files consist of the following types of
files:
l Index file: saves the geographic location
information about each land mark.
l Menu file: saves land mark numbers and
names.
l Text file: saves the information about a land
mark.
Vector File Vector Layer Vector files save the information about terrain
features such as roads, railways, streets, and
streams.
Vector files consist of the following types of files:
l Index file: saves the geographic location
information about each vector.
l Menu file: saves vector numbers and names.
l Terrain feature file: saves the information
about each terrain feature.
The information about each terrain feature must
be saved in an individual vector file.
Clutter Height Buildings Layer Clutter height files consist of the following types
File (Layer of Clutter and of files:
Building Heights) l Index file: saves the geographic location
information about each binary data file.
l Binary data file: saves the clutter heights at
each geographic location on the map.
Clutter Class Clutter Layer (Clutter Clutter class files consist of the following types of
File Class Layer) files:
l Index file: saves the geographic location
information about each clutter.
l Menu file: saves clutter class numbers and
names.
l Binary data file: saves the information about
the terrain (such as forests, lakes, flat open
areas, urban areas, and high buildings) for
calculating the path loss.
Altitude File Heights Layer Altitude files consist of the following types of
(Altitude Layer) files:
l Index file (ASCII text file): saves the
geographic location information about each
binary data file.
l Binary data file: saves the data about the height
(excluding the height of the building) above
the sea level of each geographic location in the
map.
MIF file is a map file format developed by the MapInfo company. MIF files can be used on all
the platforms supported by the MapInfo software.
MIF files consist of .mif files and .mid files.
l The .mif file consists of the file header and the data.
The file header contains the information about projection and boundary.
The data contains all the space data records and the coloring scheme for each record.
l The .mid file records the index information about the space data in the .mif file.
The .mid file is optional. Not all the MIF files have .mid files.
Coordinate Systems
This section describes the basic concepts about projection, ellipsoid, and coordinate systems.
Currently, the U-Net uses two types of coordinate systems, that is, the geodetic coordinate system
and the longitude/latitude coordinate system.
l Geodetic coordinate system
Considering the Earth as a plane, you can create a right-angle coordinate system by taking
a point of the Earth as the origin, the east direction as the positive direction of the X-axis,
and the north direction as the positive direction of the Y-axis. All the points of the plane
are in the first quadrant of the coordinate system. Then, a geographic location can be
identified by a pair of coordinates (x, y). This pair of coordinates is called geodetic
coordinates. Geodetic coordinates are continuous values. The unit is meter.
l Longitude/Latitude coordinate system
The spherical location can be identified by using the longitude/latitude coordinate system.
Values on the longitude and latitude coordinates are continuous.
The longitude of a point refers to the angle between the local meridian and the prime
meridian. The east of the prime meridian is the east longitude (180 degrees) and the
west of the prime meridian is the west longitude (180 degrees).
The latitude of a point refers to the angle between the normal line of the corresponding
geographic point on the ellipsoid and the equator. The north of the equator is called
north latitude (90 degrees) and the south of the equator is called south latitude (90
degrees).
Prerequisites
l In the digital e-map folder, there are one or more sub-graphic layer folders including
Text, Vector, Building, Clutter, and Heights.
l After including complete file types, a sub-graphic layer can be automatically recognized
by the system and then successfully imported. For example, the Heights graphic layer must
include an index file and the corresponding binary file.For the file types included in each
graphic layer, see Geographic Data.
l After a projection file is put in the Heights folder, it can be automatically recognized by
the system.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 3 Choose Quick Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-3.
Step 6 Optional: You can select a parameter in Figure 3-4 and click to modify the file path or re-
set the parameter.For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Geographic Data
in Planet Format.
The imported map files are displayed in the map window. On the GEO tab page, you can also
choose Map > Sub-graphic Layer on the navigation tree to view the imported graphic layer
data.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type and the file to be imported.
CAUTION
Before selecting a file type, read the description in Table 3-3 carefully. Otherwise, you may fail
to import the file.
You can import .grc, .grd, .bil, .shp, and .mif files in batches.
Step 6 If you import a data file of Satellitic layer, do as follows to set the geographic parameters.
1. For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps.
2. Click Import.
----End
Prerequisites
Multiple geographic data files are imported to the U-Net.
Context
On the U-Net, the geographic area for calculation is defined as follows:
l If only one geographic data file is imported, the U-Net performs calculation based on only
the geographic area corresponding to this file.
l If multiple geographic data files are imported, geographic data of multiple resolution levels
is available for the overlapped geographic area.
l When geographic data of multiple resolution levels is available for a geographic area, U-
Net selects the appropriate resolution level according to the display sequence of the
geographic data in the Clutter/Heights/Buildings layers.
l This section describes how to select the appropriate resolution level in the Heights layer.
In this case, the overlapped geographic data has multiple levels of resolution. In this case, select
the geographic data of a proper resolution level for service calculation.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, click before Map > Heights to expand the node.
The imported geographic data is displayed under Heights.
Step 3 Drag the layer of a resolution level to be used as the data source to top.
----End
Example
For example, the geographic data of multiple resolution levels (from 5 m to 40 m) have been
imported to the Heights layer. If the geographic data of three resolution levels (5 m, 10 m, and
20 m) are available for a calculation area and you want to use the top resolution level (5 m), drag
the layer of 5 m to the top, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Prerequisites
The geographic data is imported.
Procedure
l Set the display parameters of each layer.
This section takes the clutter layer as an example to describe how to set the display
parameters. The settings of the display parameters for other layers are similar to the settings
for the clutter layer. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Display
Parameters of Geographic Data.
4. Click the Display tab, and set the display parameters for each clutter.
NOTE
For the heights layer, you can set three-dimensional effect by moving the Contrast slider in
the lower left corner.
5. Click OK.
After the setting is complete, the map window is refreshed automatically. Then, you
can view the refreshed window.
l Display the heights layer in plastic mode.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Map > Heights.
2. Choose Relievo Style from the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisites
The geographic data has been imported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 Choose Map > Clutter in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Clutter and choose Parameter
Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-7.
----End
Procedure
l Use the projection mode and spheroid data in the Planet geographic data file.
Planet geographic data folder generally contains the geographic projection file. After Planet
geographic data is imported, the U-Net automatically identifies the projection mode and
spheroid data in the projection file. For details, see 3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in
Planet Format Quickly.
NOTE
If the Planet geographic data folder does not contain the projection file or if the U-Net fails to identify and
import the projection file, set the projection mode and spheroid data by referring to the following
operations.
l Use an existing projection mode and spheroid data in the coordinate system group.
1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Map.
3. Choose Coordinate from the shortcut menu.
4. In the dialog box displayed, select the projection parameters and spheroid data file.
For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Coordinate Systems.
If... Then...
If... Then...
The required 1. Select the favorite coordinate system group from the
projection mode and Find in drop-down list.
spheroid data are If the existing coordinate system groups cannot meet
unavailable your requirement, click New Group to create a
required coordinate system group.
2. Click New. The Create dialog box is displayed.
3. Set parameters related to the projection mode and
spheroid data.
4. Click Create.
After the projection mode and spheroid data are
created, the Coordinate Systems dialog box is
displayed.
5. Select the new projection configuration file in the
dialog box.
6. Click Apply.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You must manually modify related parameters after setting the projection mode and spheroid
data.
Prerequisites
The geographic data is imported.
Context
On the U-Net, information about the coordinates is displayed in the status bar and the ruler.
Table 3-4 describes the four display modes of coordinates.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map.
Step 3 Choose Map Setting from the shortcut menu.
If the geographic data is not properly imported, the right-click menu is not available.
Step 4 Select a proper coordinate display mode in Coordinate Style in the displayed dialog box.
BL Style Precision indicates the display precision of coordinates.
l When the coordinate display mode is xy reference frame and xxdxxmxx.xxsS, the value of
this parameter is 2 by default and cannot be changed.
l In other coordinate display modes, the value of this parameter is 6 by default and can be
changed as required.
----End
In Figure 3-9, the polygon drawn by users are in blue; the propagation area of each activated
base station is in green. Propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice
the cell radius.
The green areas that intersect with the blue rectangle are considered in the prediction. For
example, though sites 11 and 9 are not included in the polygon, they are considered in the
prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle; sites 10 and 8 are
not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect with the blue
rectangle.
In Figure 3-10, the lines drawn by users are in purple; the external polygon of the lines is in
blue and the width of the polygon is set by users; the propagation area of each activated base
station is in green. The propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice
the cell radius.
The green areas that intersect with the blue polygon are considered in the prediction. For
example, though sites 4 and 2 are not included in the external polygon of the lines, they are
considered in the prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle;
sites 0 and 3 are not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect
with the blue rectangle.
Prerequisites
To import a polygon represented by longitude/latitude, you must set the longitude/latitude
coordinate. For details, see 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.
Context
You can import an existing polygon or draw a new polygon.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-11.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Export a polygon.
1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons > a polygon.
3. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed dialog box as shown in Figure 3-12, select a coordinate type and then
click OK.
NOTE
If you have not set the coordinate system, Longitude / Latitude grays out.
5. In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name., and then
export a polygon.
If... Then...
Select the .mif format. Two files are displayed under the saving path with the
suffix names of .mif and .mid.
The exported file contains projection information.
Select the .tab format. Four files are displayed under the file path with the
suffixes of .id, .dat, .map, and .tab.
The exported file contains projection information.
Select the .xml format. An .xml file is displayed under the saving path.
Select the .kmz or .kml An .xml or .kml file is displayed under the saving path.
format. When you perform the operation in 4, select Longitude/
Latitude as the coordinate type. After that, the system can
export the polygon in such format.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add
Polygon from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click the workspace to add points to the polygon one by one.
l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted line,
indicating that you are drawing this line.
l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating
that you have finished drawing this line.
l You can right-click to exit.
Step 3 Double-click the last point to finish the creation of the polygon.
In the displayed U-Net dialog box, the geographic area covered by the polygon is displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
View the clutter statistics of a polygon.
After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree.
Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter
statistics of this polygon.
Procedure
Step 1 Draw a line.
1. Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add
Line from the shortcut menu.
2. Click in the workspace to draw a straight line or a polygonal line.
l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted
line, indicating that you are drawing this line.
l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating
that you have finished drawing this line.
l You can right-click to exit.
3. Double-click the point where you want to finish the drawing.
NOTE
You can also click on the toolbar to create an independent point. Alternatively, right-click in
the map window and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu.
4. Optional: Move or delete a line.
Select a line in the map window and drag it to a new position.
Select a line in the map window and press Del to delete the line.
5. Optional: Add, delete, or edit a point of a line.
Right-click a point of a line and choose Add Point, Delete Point, or Edit Point from the
shortcut menu to add, delete, or edit the point.
Two lines are automatically extended to Strip Width/2 away from the drawn line on the
two sides of the drawn line, and these lines form an extended polygon.
Alternatively, you can right-click a line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut
menu to set the extended polygon of the line.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
View the clutter statistics of a polygon.
After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree.
Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter
statistics of this polygon.
Editing Polygons
You can edit and combine polygons and modify their properties.
Procedure
l Edit a polygon.
NOTE
l You can press Ctrl+Z, or choose Edit > Undo in the U-Net main interface to undo the
preceding operation.
l The modifications in the map window can be undone at most for three steps. The
modifications on the property page, however, cannot be undone.
l Query and modify the properties of a polygon.
1. Select a polygon in the map window.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Query and modify the polygon properties on various tab pages in the Polygon
Properties dialog box.
Query and modify the names of polygons on the Region Properties tab page.
Query and modify the point coordinates of polygons on the Points List tab page.
Query and modify the font color and character size on the Font tab page.
Query and modify the fill color and line color of polygons on the Color&Line tab
page.
4. Click OK.
l Combine polygons.
1. Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
right-click Polygons and choose Polygon Operator from the shortcut menu.
2. Select the polygons to be combined and the combination mode in the Polygon
Operator dialog box.
Combine the overlapped 1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select the
areas of multiple polygons to be combined.
polygons as a new 2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.
polygon
Combine the 1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select the
combination areas of polygons to be combined.
multiple polygons as a 2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.
new polygon
Exclude the overlapped 1. Select one polygon from the left area in the Current
area of two polygons Polygons window.
from one polygon to form 2. Select Exclude.
a new polygon based on
the remaining area of this 3. Select another polygon from the right area in the
polygon. Current Polygons window.
3. Click Run.
You can preview the polygon in the Preview area.
4. Optional: Select the new polygon in the Output area. Click Rename to change the
name of the polygon.
After typing a new name, press Enter to change the name or Esc.
5. Click OK. The combined polygon is displayed in the map window.
l Set polygons in batches.
If you need to... Then...
Modify the properties 1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
of polygons in batches 2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.
3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu.
4. Set the font, fill color, and line color of polygons in batches
in the Display dialog box.
----End
Parameter Description
Add To Legend Indicates whether to add the This option is not selected by
coloring scheme of the clutter default.
class to the legend.
Add To Legend Indicates whether to add the This option is not selected by
coloring scheme of the default.
altitude to the legend.
Add To Legend Indicates whether to add the This option is not selected by
coloring scheme of the clutter default.
height to the legend.
Color Indicates the line pattern and The system maps the default
color of each vector (such as color of each clutter based on
the street and railway) in the keyword. If the mapping
display. fails, the clutter color is
orange by default.
You can click Color of each
vector to change the coloring
scheme.
Add To Legend Indicates whether to add the This option is not selected by
coloring scheme of the vector default.
layer to the legend.
Add To Legend Indicates whether to add the This option is not selected by
coloring scheme of the point default.
layer to the legend.
Clutter Class Indicates the name of a clutter The value depends on the
class. geographic data.
Clutter Height Indicates the height of a clutter. The default value is 0 and the
unit is meter.
Penetration Loss Indicates the penetration loss. The default value is 0 and the
unit is dB.
The penetration loss varies
according to the propagation
environment.
Model Standard Indicates the standard deviation The default value is 7 and the
Deviation of the slow fading margin. unit is dB.
The standard deviation varies
according to the propagation
environment.
Shadow Corr Indicates the factor of shadow The default value is 0.5.
fading. The factor varies according to
the propagation environment.
C/(I+N)Standard Indicates the standard deviation The default value is 8 and the
Deviation based on C/(I + N). unit is dB.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
of polygons in the Polygon Properties dialog box or viewing the clutter information about
polygons in the Clutter Statistics of XXX dialog box.
Color Color.
Font Font.
Size Size.
Style Style.
Transparency Transparence.
Clutter Class Indicates the name of a clutter class. The value depends
on the geographic
data.
Area(sq.km.) Indicates the size of a clutter in the polygon. The value depends
on the size of the
polygon and the
geographic data.
The unit is square
kilometer.
COST231- 800 MHz to l Terrain Three parts are Urban areas with
WIM 2000 MHz condition. involved: free a lot of high
l Clutter space propagation buildings.
statistics. loss, rooftop-to-
street diffraction
and scattering
loss, and multi-
shielding loss.
Configure
parameters for
each part.
Context
Propagation model of different types has different properties, which, however, are configured
in the same way. This section takes the Cost Hata (default) propagation model as an example to
describe how to configure a propagation model.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Propagation Models > Cost231 Hata > Cost Hata (default).
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-13.
NOTE
If you do not want to directly modify the properties of the propagation model, choose Duplicate from the shortcut
menu and modify the properties of the duplicated propagation model.
Step 4 Set the properties of the propagation model in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description
of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model.
1. On the General tab page, change the name and description of the propagation model.
2. On the Parameters tab page, configure the parameters related to the propagation model
and set the formula.
3. Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: You can set the parameters related to the propagation model in a centralized mode
by exporting and importing the parameters.
1. Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.
2. Right-click and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the parameters related to
the propagation model as an .xls file.
3. Open the .xls file. You can set and modify the parameters.
4. Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.
5. Right-click and choose Import from the shortcut menu to import the parameters related to
the propagation model.
If the parameters are successfully imported, the system prompts that the import is successful
and updates the parameters based on the imported file.
If the parameters fail to be imported, check whether the information about the .xls file, such
as the heading, is correct and complete.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l To delete a propagation model, choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
l After the propagation model is configured, you can assign it to cells for calculating the path
loss. For details, see 3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models.
NOTE
If you have set the Volcano propagation model for a cell, you need to manually import the map data on the
Setting tab page of the corresponding model (the map data imported from U-Net does not take effect for
the Volcano propagation model). Otherwise, path loss calculation cannot proceed.
Prerequisites
l Propagation models are available in the project.
l Cells exist in the project.
Context
To shorten the calculation time, the U-Net enables users to assign the following propagation
models to each cell:
l Main propagation model: high calculation accuracy and short calculation radius
l Extended propagation model: low calculation accuracy and long calculation radius
If the calculation accuracy of the main propagation model is not defined, the U-Net calculates
the main propagation model based on the calculation accuracy of the imported geographic data.
In addition, the U-Net can calculate the extended propagation model only when the propagation
model, calculation radius, and calculation precision of the extended propagation model are
defined.
Procedure
l Assign a propagation model to a group of cells.
In normal cases, cells with the same parameters and in the same environment use the same
propagation model. You can group these cells together and assign a propagation model to
the cell group.
For a multi-mode network, you need to set Propagation Model on the tab pages
corresponding to each RAT.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Frequency Bands > Open Table from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
If the project is about a hybrid network, the Open Table menu has a submenu.
Step 4 Set bands in the window containing a band table. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameters for Setting Bands.
You can also double-click the heading in the table, and set properties of all bands in the
Bandwidth Configuration dialog box.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Assign the band to a cell.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box.
Click GSMTRX for a GSM network and LTE-FDDCell for an LTE-FDD network.
5. Set the value of Frequency Band on the tab page to assign the band to a cell.
l You can also import and export band information in the window that contains a band table.
For detailed description of parameters, see 10.8 Managing Table Windows.
Start Channel Index Indicates the start index of l LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD
the available frequencies networks: from 0 to 128.
corresponding to a band. l CDMA network: from 0
to 2
End Channel Index Indicates the end index of the
available frequencies The value of Start Channel
corresponding to a band. Index must be less than or
equal to the value of End
Channel Index.
a(Hm) Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a
function of the size of the coverage area.
l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12
l In the Rural/Small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6lg(f) - K7) x Hm
- (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value
varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in
K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
f Indicates the frequency range. The value rang is from 1,500 MHz to
2,000 MHz.
Hb Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is
from 30 m to 200 m.
d Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1
m to 10 m.
De 49 33 13 44 6. 1. 0. 1. 0. 3 0 0 5. 4. 18 40
ns .3 .9 . .9 55 11 7 56 8 4 78 . .
e 82 33 94
ur
ba
n
Ur 46 33 13 44 6. 1. 0. 1. 0. 0 0 0 5. 4. 18 40
ba .3 .9 . .9 55 11 7 56 8 4 78 . .
n/ 82 33 94
Su
bu
rb
Sc K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
en 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ar
io
Ru 46 33 13 44 6. 1. 0. 1. 0. 0 18 35 5. 4. 18 35
ral .3 .9 . .9 55 11 7 56 8 . . 4 78 . .
82 33 94 33 94
Hi 46 33 13 44 6. 1. 0. 1. 0. 0 18 40 5. 4. 18 40
gh .3 .9 . .9 55 11 7 56 8 . . 4 78 . .
wa 82 33 94 33 94
y/
Hi
gh
-
sp
ee
d
rai
lw
ay
Parameter Description
a(Hm) Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a
function of the size of the coverage area.
l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12
l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x
Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value
varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in
K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
Parameter Description
f Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 1500 MHz to
2000 MHz.
Hb Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is
from 30 m to 200 m.
d Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1
m to 10 m.
Dens 49.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
e
urban
Urba 46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
n
Subur 46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
b
Rural 46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
High 46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
way
High- 46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
speed
railw
ay
ate: Clutter Loss Indicates the algorithm for Available algorithms are as
parame Calculate Method calculating the clutter loss. follows:
ters for l None
diffract
ion l Uniform
calcula l Triangular
tion l Logarithmic
l Exponential
Gener Limitation to free Indicates whether to limit The default value is False.
al: space loss the loss in the free space.
comm
on
calcula
tion
parame
ters
Parameter Description
K2 Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor.
The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength
that changes with the distance.
HTxeff Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit is
meter.
K4 Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this
parameter indicates the diffraction status.
DiffractionLoss Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unit
is dB.
HRxeff Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit is
meter.
Scenari K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7
o
Diffracti Add building Indicates whether to consider The default value is False.
on height building height.
Calculat
e: Clutter Loss Indicates the algorithm for Available algorithms are as
paramete Calculate calculating the clutter loss. follows:
rs for Method l None
diffracti l Uniform
on
calculati l Triangular
on l Logarithmic
l Exponential
General Limitation to Indicates whether to limit the The default value is True.
: free space loss loss in the free space.
common
calculati
on
paramete
rs
Paramet K1~K7 For the description of For the parameter values, see
ers: parameters in the formula, see Values of the Parameters of
calculati Formula of the SPM900 the Formula in Typical
on Propagation Model. Scenarios.
paramete
rs
K2 Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor.
The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength
that changes with the distance.
Parameter Description
HTxeff Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit is
meter.
K4 Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this
parameter indicates the diffraction status.
DiffractionLoss Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unit
is dB.
HRxeff Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit is
meter.
Gener Limitation to Indicates whether to limit the The default value is True.
al: free space loss loss in the free space.
comm
on
calcula
tion
param
eters
Parameter Description
a(Hm) Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a
function of the size of the coverage area.
l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12
l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x
Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value
varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in
K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
f Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 150 MHz to
1500 MHz.
Hb Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is
from 30 m to 200 m.
d Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1
m to 10 m.
Hi 64 26 13 44 6. 1. 0. 1. 0. -4. 18 40 0 4. 18 40
gh . . . .9 55 1 7 56 8 78 . . 78 . .
- 77 16 82 33 94 33 94
sp
ee
d
rai
lw
ay
De 69 26 13 44 6. 1. 0. 1. 0. 0 3. 11 4. 4. 18 40
ns . . . .9 55 1 7 56 8 2 . 97 78 . .
e 55 16 82 75 33 94
ur
ba
n
Sc K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
en 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ar
io
Ur 69 26 13 44 6. 1. 0. 1. 0. 0 0 0 0 4. 18 40
ba . . . .9 55 1 7 56 8 78 . .
n 55 16 82 33 94
Su 67 26 13 44 6. 1. 0. 1. 0. -2 5. 0 0 4. 18 40
bu . . . .9 55 1 7 56 8 4 78 . .
rb 55 16 82 33 94
Ru 64 26 13 44 6. 1. 0. 1. 0. -4. 18 35 0 4. 18 40
ral . . . .9 55 1 7 56 8 78 . . 78 . .
77 16 82 33 94 33 94
Gen Limitation to free space Indicates whether to limit The default value is True.
eral loss the loss in the free space.
:
com
mon
calc
ulati
on
para
met
ers
Parameter Description
a(Hm) Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a
function of the size of the coverage area.
l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12
l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x
Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value
varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in
K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
f Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 150 MHz to
1500 MHz.
Hb Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is
from 30 m to 200 m.
d Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Parameter Description
Hm Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1
m to 10 m.
Dens 72.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
e
urban
Urba 69.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
n
Subur 61.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
b
Rural 54.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
High 54.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
way
High- 54.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0
speed
railw
ay
Diffrac Effect Tx Height Indicates the algorithm for Available algorithms are as
tion Calculate Method calculating the effective follows:
Calcul height of the transmitter l AbsSpot
ate: antenna.
parame l Height above the ground
ters for l Height above the
diffract average ground
ion l Spot Hr
calculat
ion l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
Gener Limitation to free Indicates whether to limit The default value is True.
al: space loss the loss in the free space.
commo
n
calculat
ion
parame
ters
Parameter Description
d Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
NLOS K4 + K5 -28 20 28 0 4 2
house x K6
NLOS K4 + K5 -28 20 30 15 4 2
office x (K6-1)
NLOS K4 + K5 -28 20 22 6 3 2
store x (K6-1)
LOS 0 -28 20 20 0 0 0
Parameters: Sets the Angel between Indicates the angle The default value is
parameters for incident-wave and between the road and 30.
common calculation. road the incident wave. Unit: degree.
Parameter Description
Ka l Hbs>Hroof: Ka = NKL6
l Hbs<=Hroof And d>=0.5 km: Ka = NKL7 NKL8*(Hbs -
Hroof)
l Hbs<=Hroof And d<0.5 km: Ka = NKL9-NKL10*(Hbs -
Hroof)*(d/0.5)
Kd l Hbs>Hroof: Kd = NKL11
l Hbs<=Hroof: Kd = NKL12 NKL13*((Hbs -Hroof)/Hroof)
Parameter Description
Indicates the angle between the road and the incident wave.
Unit: degree.
d Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Keenan- 32.5 20 20 20 2
Motley
Clutter Clutter.
Context
l The U-Net allows you to import and export antenna data, including 2D and 3D data, as .txt
and .msi files.
l Before importing antenna files, you can manually set the value of each parameter in the
antenna files. If a value in the antenna file is not within the specified value range, the antenna
file may fail to be imported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu., as shown in Figure 3-14.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported..
l If data of a single antenna is imported, select the .txt or .msi file corresponding to the antenna.
l If data of multiple antennas is imported, select .txt or .msi files in batches.
l If an imported antenna name is the same as the name of an existing antenna, the U-Net adds
a number to the imported antenna name to distinguish the two antennas.
Step 5 Click Open. The Import Antenna File dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15.
l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lower
part indicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported.
l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, configure antenna parameters. For details about the parameters, see
Table 3-15.
Parameter Description
Step 7 After the configuration, click Import to import the antenna file to the project.
NOTE
l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lower part
indicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported.
l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l You can export data of a single antenna.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas > an antenna.
3. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name.. Then,
export the antenna data.
l You can export the antenna data in batches.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.
3. Right-click antennas and choose Export > Export File Type from the shortcut menu.
Then, export antenna data to files in batches.
l You can view antennas in the window.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
2. Choose Antennas > an antenna from the navigation tree.
3. Right-click an antenna and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Antenna
Properties dialog box is displayed.
4. View the antennas in the window on the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern
tab pages.
If you have imported 3D data of an antenna, you can drag the slider in the lower left corner
of the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern tab pages to change the value of
Attenuation, as shown in Figure 3-16.
Procedure
l Create an antenna
1. Select a method for creating an antenna.
If... Then...
Create an antenna directly 1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.
3. Choose New from the shortcut menu. The
Antenna Properties dialog box is displayed.
If... Then...
Copy an existing antenna 1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
file to create an antenna 2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas > an
antenna.
3. Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.
4. Select the copied antenna.
5. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the antenna property dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see
Parameters in the Antenna Property Setting Dialog Box.
3. Click OK.
l Create an antenna group.
When an antenna group supports multiple carriers, the U-Net can automatically match the
antenna gains with different bands to perform calculations. The antenna group supports
smart antenna.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Modifying antenna properties
1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.
3. Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The Antenna Table dialog box is
displayed.
4. Double-click the target cell, and then modify the antenna properties in the displayed
dialog box.
l Allocating antennas to cells
You can perform this operation after creating or importing cells.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. On the Antenna Config tab page, select an antenna type from the Antenna drop-
down list.
5. Click OK.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > TMA Equipment from the shortcut menu. The TMA
Equipment dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a TMA. For detailed description of parameters, see
Table 3-16.
NOTE
l After you set the TMA parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row for
setting other TMAs.
l You can modify the original TMA parameter settings by referring to Table 3-16.
Parameter Meaning
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can assign the TMAs to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign the
configured TMA, by default, the system does not consider the TMA during the calculation of
total loss.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Feeder Equipment from the shortcut menu. The
Feeders dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a feeder. For detailed description of parameters, see
Table 3-17.
NOTE
l After you set the feeder parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row for
setting other feeders.
l You can modify the original feeder parameter settings by referring to Table 3-17.
Parameter Meaning
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can assign the feeders to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign the
configured feeder, by default, the system does not consider the feeder during the calculation of
total loss.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. On the Antenna Config tab page in the displayed dialog box, click next to
Equipment. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.
5. Clear Input Total Loss.
6. Select a feeder in Feeder.
7. Set the feeder length of the transmitter and the receiver in Feeder Length(m).
8. Click OK.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Site Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Site
Equipment dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a base station. For details about the parameters, see
Table 3-18.
NOTE
l After you set the base station parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row
for setting other sites.
l You can modify the original base station parameter settings by referring to Table 3-18.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can assign the base stations to all cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not
assign the configured base station, the system calculates the total loss based on the default base
station.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. In the Antenna Config area of the displayed Transceiver Properties dialog box, click
following the Equipment parameter. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
5. Select a base station from the Site drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
Pattern Electrical Tilt: (For information only) Indicates the electrical downtilt of an antenna.
The value range is from -90 to 90 and the unit
is degree.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Antenna Name Indicates the name of an existing antenna, that is, the name
of an antenna in the antenna group.
After an antenna is selected, a bland row is added
automatically for users to add a new antenna.
Context
The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes
(QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD.
Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank line marked with * in the table to set an MCS type, as shown in Figure 3-17. For
the detailed description of parameters, see Table 3-24.
Parameter Description
Coding Rate Indicates the coding rate. The value range is from 0 to
2.
Parameter Description
----End
Context
For an LTE-FDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideo
Conferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
If you need to... Then...
Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services >
LTE-FDD.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-18.
3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table
3-25.
Modify an existing 1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD > the
service type existing service type in the navigation tree.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Change parameter values for the existing service type by referring
to Table 3-25.
Priority Service priority weighting factor, which is used to adjust the service
priority for subscribers in capacity simulation.
1 indicates the lowest priority.
MAC PDU(kbit) Size of a packet for transmitting CS service data at the MAC layer.
Parameter Description
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-FDD.
Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set the name of a receiver.
If... Then...
Create a receiver type. In a blank row marked with *, type the name of the new
receiver and select type of MCS Table.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parameters
for the receiver type by referring to Table 3-26.
If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed.
Step 6 Click OK.
IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate. The value range is from 0 to
100.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
type LTE-FDD.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 3-27.
Modify an 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
existing terminal LTE-FDD > the existing terminal type.
type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify the parameters of the existing terminal type by referring to
Table 3-27
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Number of Reception Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a terminal.
Antenna Ports
Step 3 ClickOK.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.
Create a user 1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, right-click and then
type choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles from the shortcut menu.
2. Set parameters for the new user type by referring to Table 3-30.
Modify an 1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose Traffic
existing user type Parameters > User Profiles > An existing user type; right-click and
then choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. Modify the parameters of the existing user type by referring to Table
3-30.
Compare 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles.
attributes of user 2. Right-click and choose Compare User Profiles Elements from the
types shortcut menu. The User Profiles Compare dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-21.
NOTE
You can select two user types or more to compare in the Select User Profiles
area.
3. Click Compare. In the displayed User Profiles Compare Result
dialog box, check the attributes of the compared user types, as shown
in Figure 3-22.
4. Compare attributes of user types by referring to Table 3-30.
Parameter Description
Context
The U-Net provides six default mobility types: 30 km/h, 50 km/h, 60 km/h, 90 km/h, Fixed, and
Pedestrian.
Procedure
Step 1 Create or modify a mobility type.
Create a mobility type 1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, right-click
Traffic Parameters > Mobility Types, and then choose
New from the shortcut menu. The Mobility Properties
dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters for the new mobility type by referring to
Table 3-31.
3. Click OK.
Modify an existing mobility 1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose Traffic
type Parameters > Mobility Types > An existing mobility
type; right-click and then choose Properties from the
shortcut menu. The Mobility Properties dialog box is
displayed.
2. Modify the parameters for the existing mobility type by
referring to Table 3-31.
3. Click OK.
----End
Context
l Not all the base station data files can be imported to the U-Net. The U-Net has certain
requirements on the format of the data files (site data, cell data, or transceiver data) to be
imported.
l Generally, you can export base station data and the corresponding configuration file from
the U-Net, modify the relevant parameters, and then import the data to the U-Net for
analysis.
Procedure
Step 1 After exporting base station data and the corresponding configuration file, save or edit the data
for future use.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. Select the objects to be exported.
If... Then...
3. In the Data Export dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see
Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box.
TIP
l You can click Save to save the current parameter configuration in the dialog box as a
configuration file.
l You can also click Load to load an existing configuration file. The U-Net exports data based on
the parameter configuration in the configuration file.
4. Click Export.
5. Set the file type, saving path, and file name. Then, save the settings.
After the data export is complete, you can open the exported file, and view or modify the
base station data of the current project.
Step 2 Import the base station data and the corresponding configuration file into the U-Net to
automatically create base stations.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. Select the objects to be imported.
If... Then...
3. To ensure that the data is successfully exported, see 9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching
in the Field Mapping Area to check field matching.
4. Optional: In the Data Import dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description,
see Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box.
5. Click Import.
l After the data import is complete, the system creates base stations based on the base
station data and displays the base stations in the map window.
l If a file fails to be imported, modify the file based on the error information displayed
in the system.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 4 Set site parameters on the General tab page of the displayed dialog box. For details, see
Parameters for Creating Sites.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l You can view or modify site properties. In addition, you can move or delete a single site.
1. Select the site in the map window.
2. Perform the following operations as required.
If... Then...
You want to view or 1. Choose Site Properties from the shortcut menu.
modify site properties 2. In the displayed dialog box, view or modify site
properties such as site name and coordinate values.
You want to move a site Directly drag the mouse to move the position of the
selected site.
The preceding operations can be performed in both the Explorer window and the map
window. This section describes the operations performed in only the map window.
l You can also rank or group sites, audit the distance between two sites, and set the display
effect of a site.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Site.
3. Perform the following operations as required.
If... Then...
You want to group sites Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcut
menu.
You want to rank sites Choose Order from the shortcut menu.
You want to audit the 1. Right-click and choose Distance Audit from the
distance between two shortcut menu.
sites 2. In the displayed dialog box, set Distance(m)<=,
which specifies the audit distance.
3. Click Audit.
The names of sites whose distances are within the
distance specified by the preset value and their actual
distances are displayed in the main window of the U-
Net.
If... Then...
You want to set the 1. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu.
display effect of a base 2. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters such as the
station display field and color.
3. Click OK.
You want to enable the 1. Right-click and choose Open Table from the shortcut
display or hiding of menu. The Sites table is displayed.
property columns of 2. Right-click a point in the Sites table and choose
basic site parameters Display Columns from the shortcut menu.
3. In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box,
view the basic site parameters in the Sites table and
select or clear the check boxes of columns that need
to be displayed or hidden in the Sites table. For details,
see Basic Parameters of a Site.
4. Close the Columns to be displayed dialog box. The
Sites table is updated and displays property columns
based on the preceding settings.
Procedure
l View base station templates.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
For example, .
2. The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
l Create a base station template.
1. Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then,
a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
2. Set the properties in the LTE-FDD base station template. For details, see Parameters
for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.
3. Click OK.
l View and modify properties of the base station template.
1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see
Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.
4. Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
Prerequisites
The required base station template is created.
Procedure
l Create a single site in batches.
The U-Net places a batch of base stations in the area. In the meantime, sites and cells
of the base stations are created.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l View and modify site properties.
You can right-click a site in the Explorer window or in the map window and then choose
the corresponding menu item to view and modify site properties.
l Move the site.
When modifying site properties, you can change the position of the site by changing
coordinates. Alternatively, you can drag the site to a new position in the map window.
l Delete the site.
You can right-click the site in the explorer window or in the map window and then choose
Delete from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can select the site in the map window
and then press the Delete key.
l Export, search for, and group the site, set display properties of the base station.
Prerequisites
Base stations (including sites and cells) are available.
Procedure
Step 1 Create repeater equipment.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
3. Choose Equipment > Repeater Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Repeater
Equipment window is displayed.
4. To set the parameters of the new repeater equipment in the blank row, see Parameters for
Creating Repeaters.
l Enter the name of the new repeater equipment. After you enter the name, the system
creates a blank row to configure other repeater equipment.
l Click a property cell to change the value of the property.
Step 2 Create a repeater.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
2. Choose Repeaters > New from the shortcut menu. The Repeater Properties dialog box
is displayed.
Alternatively, select the transceiver to which a repeater is added and then click on the
toolbar. Then, you can add a repeater directly in the map window.
3. To configure the properties of the repeater, see Parameters for Creating Repeaters.
4. Click OK.
----End
multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different
radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.
Prerequisites
A site has been created on the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set the transceiver parameters. For details, see Parameters for
Creating Transceivers.
If an independent site exists, you can click on the toolbar and move the cursor to the site. When a
square frame appears around the site, click the left mouse key. After that, the system automatically creates
a transceiver and corresponding cells for the site.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l You can group transceivers.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
3. Right-click Transceiver and choose Group By > Grouping Mode. The U-Net
automatically groups the transceivers based on the selected grouping mode. Two
levels of grouping are supported. Table 3-32 lists the default grouping modes of
transceivers.
NOTE
You can choose Group By > More and set to display the grouping dimension in Group By.
l Alternatively, you can view common properties of a transceiver in the transceiver table and
manually set the property columns to be displayed in the table.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
3. Right-click Transceiver and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The
Transceiver table table is displayed.
NOTE
Common engineering parameters such as Total loss DL, Total loss UL, Number of
Transmission Antenna Ports, Number of Transmission Antennas, Number of Reception
Antennas, and Input Total Loss are displayed in the Transceiver table table by default to
reduce the time required for selection.
4. Right-click in the Transceiver table table and choose Display Columns from the
shortcut menu.
5. In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box, view the basic site parameters
in the Sites table and select or clear the check boxes of columns that need to be
displayed or hidden in the Sites table.
6. Close the dialog box. The Transceiver table table is updated and displays the property
columns based on the preceding settings.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 4 On the LTE-FDDCell tab page, set LTE-FDD cell parameters, as shown in Figure 3-24.
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells describes the parameters.
l Table 3-42 describes the Transmission Mode parameter.
----End
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Hexagon Radius(m) Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value
ranges from 1 to 100000.
l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the
radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius
(m) in the current site template by default.
l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in
the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty
by default.
Dx(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Azimuth Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit
is degree.
Parameter Description
Input Total Loss l If you select the check box, you need to manually type
the total loss.
l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total
loss.
TMA
Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click to
modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m) Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB) Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Parameter Description
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB) Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and
miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Use Altitude For Calculation Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for
calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the
altitude of a site for calculation.
Comments Description.
Comments Description.
General tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter Description
Max Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit is dBm.
Parameter Description
Actual Load(DL) Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value ranges
from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL) Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Target IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the target ratio of the sum of interference and noise
to the volume of increased noise on the uplink.
Actual IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the actual Interface Over Thermal (IoT) on the
uplink.
Priority Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is,
the higher the priority of the cell is.
Advance tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter Description
Edge Frequency Style(UL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2,
or Style3).
Parameter Description
Edge Frequency Style(DL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
in the downlink.
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state
is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3).
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the following
4 states and 11 modes are supported: Reuse3 (Style1,
Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a,
Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full power Reuse1
(AllPowerReuse1), and low power Reuse1
(LowPowerReuse1).
l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state,
the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all users
and the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameter
is set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in
the cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter is
set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the
cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Control Channel Overhead l Uplink area: Indicates the number of resource blocks
(RBs) on the uplink control channels. The value range is
from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of
RBs of the entire bandwidth.
l Downlink area: Indicates the number of orthogonal
frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the
downlink PDCCH.
RS SINR Access Threshold Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)
(DL)(dB) access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit is
dB.
Power Offset tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter Description
PBCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power
of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and
the unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power
of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and
the unit is dB.
PCFICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PCFICH power relative
to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from
-15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PDCCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative
to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from
-15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PHICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PHICH power relative to the power
of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The
unit is dB.
CCU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by
users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RS
power.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -6.
CEU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by
users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.
PB(dB) Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols
of the RE relative to the RSRE power. The value can be 0,
1, 2, or 3.
Propagation Models tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter Description
TM3 Indicates the open-loop space reuse, which is used for the
eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM4 Indicates the closed-loop space reuse, which is used for the
eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
Value Description
Parameter Description
Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value ranges
from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL) Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Actual Load(DL) Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value ranges
from 0 to 1.
Parameter Description
PBCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power
of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power
of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
PCFICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink physical control format
indicator channel (PCFICH) power relative to the power of
the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The
unit is dB.
PDCCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative
to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from
-15 to 15. The unit is dB.
Max Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit is dBm.
Actual IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the actual Interface Over Thermal (IoT) on the
uplink.
High Speed Indicates the speed in a cell. This parameter can be set to one
of the following values:
l LowSpeed
l HighSpeed
l HighwaySpeed
Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends on the
neighbor relationship).
The value of this parameter must be an integer larger than 0.
RS SINR Access Threshold Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)
(DL)(dB) access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit
is dB.
Priority Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is,
the higher the priority of the cell is.
PB(dB) Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols
of the RE relative to the RSRE power. The value can be 0,
1, 2, or 3.
Parameter Description
PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Indicates the minimum PCI reuse tiers (depends on the
neighbor relationship).
Local Cell ID Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating the cell
from other cells under the same eNodeB.
CCU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by
users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RS
power.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -6.
CEU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by
users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is
-1.77.
Parameter Description
VIP For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameters cannot
be changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt, and pilot
power.
Parameter Description
Azimuth Min. Value Minimum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value ranges
from -360 to 360.
The default value is -20.
Azimuth Max. Value Maximum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value
ranges from -360 to 360.
The default value is 20.
Electronic Downtilt Min. Minimum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value
Value ranges from -90 to 90.
The default value is -10.
Electronic Downtilt Max. Maximum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value
Value ranges from -90 to 90.
The default value is 14.
RsPower Min. Value(dB) Minimum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value
ranges from 0 to 46.
The default value is 10.
RsPower Max. Value(dB) Maximum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value
ranges from 0 to 46.
The default value is 20.
Neighbors list Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button.
For details, see Table 3-44.
Parameter Description
Value Description
TM3 Indicates the open-loop space reuse, which is used for the
eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM4 Indicates the closed-loop space reuse, which is used for the
eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
Edge Frequency Style(UL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1,
Style2, or Style3).
Parameter Description
Edge Frequency Style(DL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
in the downlink.
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state
is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3).
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the following
4 states and 11 modes are supported: Reuse3 (Style1,
Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a,
Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full power Reuse1
(AllPowerReuse1), and low power Reuse1
(LowPowerReuse1).
l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state,
the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all users
and the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameter
is set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in
the cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter is
set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in
the cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Edge Frequency Style Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
on the uplink and downlink.
Control Channel Overhead l Uplink area: Indicates the number of resource blocks
(RBs) on the uplink control channels. The value range is
from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of
RBs of the entire bandwidth.
l Downlink area: Indicates the number of orthogonal
frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the
downlink PDCCH.
Target IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the target ratio of the sum of interference and noise
to the volume of increased noise on the uplink.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Dx(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Azimuth Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit
is degree.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Dx(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Azimuth Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit
is degree.
Parameter Description
Input Total Loss l If you select the check box, you need to manually type
the total loss.
l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total
loss.
TMA
Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click to
modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m) Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB) Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB) Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and
miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
NOTE
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the
corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut
menu.
Table 3-49 lists the LTE-FDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Coverage by Best Server Cell with the highest DL RSRP among the cells that
Signal Level receive downlink signals.
(DL)
DL RSRP Strength of single downlink reference signal (RS)
received from the primary serving cell.
DL ICIC Zone Downlink ICIC area, that is, the downlink central
area and edge area that meet the downlink ICIC
threshold.
UL ICIC ZONE Uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplink central area and
edge area that meet the uplink ICIC threshold.
Coverage by PUSCH MCS The highest MCS supported by the uplink PUSCH.
MCS(UL)
1 Traversing all the cells Determine whether the cells in the calculation area are
activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction
counters of this cell are not calculated.
2 Obtaining the path l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate the
loss matrix path loss matrix.
l If the path loss matrix exists, it can be obtained
directly.
3 Querying the antenna You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain,
gain, equipment loss, equipment loss, and penetration loss during the
and penetration loss calculation of link loss.
4 Predicting slow fading To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with
by using the a certain probability. Certain power of the base station
shadowing margin is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reserved
power is called shadowing margin.
You can enable the U-Net to take the shadowing
margin into account during the calculation of link loss.
6 Calculating the power You can calculate the power of interference noises and
of interference noises determine the handover area.
to determine the
handover area
Loss caused by the Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to
human body the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Path loss Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Penetration loss Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles,
and leaves.
Total loss of the base Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
station feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l Propagation models are assigned to cells.
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l Calculation
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
Calculate forcibly Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path
Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
Step 5 Query the calculation results
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Context
l In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters:
DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH
SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL
RS SINR.
l In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,
PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
l In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for
the following predication counters:
Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
l In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set
for the following predication counters:
CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/
Nt.
l In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to
be set for the following predication counters:
Coverage By CIR.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display
dialog box is displayed.
The map information is Click Default Value to change the default values of parameters
not imported under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard
Deviation.
The map information is Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parameters
imported under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard
Deviation.
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
----End
Prerequisites
l A U-Net project is already created.
l The geographic data is imported.
l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5. Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6. Click OK.
Step 2 Skip this step if you have set the power offset of the PBCH channel relative to the RS channel
in the cell properties. Otherwise, proceed with the following steps.
1. Select a transceiver in the map window.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Set the related parameters on the cell property tab.
For example, to calculate the DL PBCH Signal Level prediction indicator, you need to set
the PBCH to RS parameter.
Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
Step 4 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-28.
Step 5 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-FDD
Prediction Counters.
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.See Figure 3-29 For parameter
description, see Parameters for Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups.
Step 8 Click OK
Step 9 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Prerequisites
l The geographic data is imported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialog
box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the name of a prediction group by referring to Parameters in the New Prediction Group
Dialog Box, and select prediction items for the prediction group.
Step 5 Click Next. Then, set properties such as calculation area, prediction conditions, prediction bands
for new prediction groups by referring to Parameter in the LTE Group Properties Dialog
Box.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Optional: If you clear Calculate Now in Step 4, right-click the prediction group and choose
Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the number
of cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to view
details.
Prerequisites
The prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.
Option Description
Re-calculate counters. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >
counter item.
2. Choose Unlock from the shortcut menu.
This counter is in the unlocked state.
If Lock is displayed in the shortcut menu, this counter is
in the unlocked state.
3. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
4. Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.
All the unlocked counters in this group will be used for
calculation.
If all the counters are in the locked state, Calculate is
unavailable.
Add or delete a counter. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
2. Choose Edit Studies from the shortcut menu.
3. In the displayed dialog box, select or clear the check box
of the counter to be added or deleted.
4. Click OK.
5. Perform the following operations as required.
l if a counter is added, the system displays the new
counter under the prediction group node in the
navigation tree. In this case, you need to re-calculate
counters. For detailed operations, see Re-calculate
counters.
l If a counter is deleted, the system deletes the counter
from the prediction group node in the navigation tree.
In addition, the corresponding rendering color is
removed.
If the deleted counter is Best Server and a traffic map
uses this prediction group, data of this prediction
group will also be deleted from the traffic map.
View detailed report on a 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >
counter. counter item.
2. Right-click and choose Generate Report from the
shortcut menu.
3. In the displayed dialog box, view detailed information
about the counter. For detailed operations, see
Parameters for Viewing Detailed Prediction Result
Reports.
NOTE
You can select a hot spot from the drop-down list box in the
Statistics Zone area to view information about the specified hot
spot.
Option Description
Set the properties of a counter. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >
counter item.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters such as
display color on the Display tab page.
Lock or unlock counters in 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
batches. 2. Right-click and select or clear the check box of Studies
Locked from the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisites
The prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Set the legend information and display properties of prediction.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Study Properties dialog box is displayed.
4. Click the Display tab.
5. Set items such as counter range, display color, and transparency.
6. Select the ranges to be displayed in the Legend window. See Figure 3-30.
7. Select Add to legend. The selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.
8. Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the
Legend window.
9. Click OK.
Choose Window > Legend on the menu bar. The Legend window is displayed.
In the displayed window, you can query the name and color corresponding to each range. If you
have selected Show Statistic, you can also query the coverage area corresponding to a range
and the percentage of the area to the whole calculation area.
The map displays the cell coverage according to the preset legend color and transparency. In
addition, the Legend window displays the size and percentage of coverage areas, helping you
to query the coverage and perform relevant analysis.
----End
Prerequisites
The coverage prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Groupx and choose
Statistics(CDF) or Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu. The Statistics dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-31. The following takes the CDF chart for example.
Step 3 Select a prediction counter, hot spot area, statistical area, and display mode from the Study,
Zone, Statistics Area, and Figure Style drop-down list boxes respectively.
The CDF, inverse CDF, or PDF chart of the selected counter is displayed in the Statistics dialog
box.
NOTE
l You can select a hot spot from the Zone drop-down list box to view the information about the selected hot
spot.
l For the LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD networks, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best
Server, Handover Area, DL ICIC Zone, UL ICIC Zone, Pilot Pollution, PDSCH MCS, and PUSCH
MCS cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are discrete values. You can select
DL MAC Peak Throughput, UL MAC Peak Throughput, DL Application Peak Throughput, and UL
Application Peak Throughput to view the average throughput and cell edge throughput.
l For the GSM network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area,
Coverage Area, and Coding Scheme cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are
discrete values.
l For the UMTS network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area,
HSDPA CQI, Pilot Pollution, and Number Of Service cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because
their results are discrete values.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu to
save the chart in the Statistics dialog box. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif,
or .bmp format.
l Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu to print the
chart in the Statistics dialog box.
l Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy the
chart in the Statistics dialog box to the clipboard.
Procedure
Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.
Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.
Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors
on the map window.
l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4. Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5. View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.
----End
Example
This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.
The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna
downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. Click Antenna Config tab Page.
5. Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the
two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.
Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the
recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.
To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure
l To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from
the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
l To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut
menu.
l To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut
menu.
model is allocated to a cell, the U-Net provides the profile terrain and calculates the path loss
between the cell and the receive point and the receive level of the corresponding terminal based
on the NE data and geographic data.
Prerequisites
l The geographic data has been imported.
l Base stations are available.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell and a carrier from the Transceiver and Cell drop-down
list boxes respectively.
Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set cell edge coverage probability in the Cell Edge Coverage
Probability(%) text box. If Indoor Coverage is selected, penetration loss will be taken into
account.
Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, select a capacity simulation group, terminal type, service type,
and mobility type from the Simulation Group, Terminal, Service, and Mobility drop-down
list boxes, respectively. Then, set neighboring cell PDSCH load and neighboring cell PDCCH
load in the Neighbour PDSCH Load and Neighbour PDCCH Load text boxes respectively.
Step 5 Switch back to the Profile tab page and click a point on the map.
The point changes to , which represents a terminal. Then, a line connecting the terminal and
the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the pointer to move the cursor.
NOTE
The preceding operations can also be performed on other tab pages including the Reception tab page. The
cursor, however, moves slowly on these tab pages. Therefore, you are advised to switch to the Profile tab
page to perform the operation.
Step 6 On the Profile tab page, view the terrain profile analysis information.
l The grey area indicates the terrain condition between the cell and the receive point.
The X-coordinate indicates the geographic distance between the cell and the receive point.
The Y-coordinate indicates the altitude.
l The blue ellipse indicates the Fresnel region of diffraction.
l The green straight line indicates the line-of-sight distance.
l Select DL RSRP to view the receive level of the terminal.
l Select Path Loss to view the path loss between the cell and the receive point.
l Propagation model used by the cell.
l Geographic distance between the cell and the terminal.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l View detailed link budget.
Right-click the profile and choose Link Budget from the shortcut menu. The Link
Budget dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see Parameter
Description of the Link Budget Window.
l View detailed information about the propagation model. You can perform this operation
only when the propagation model is SPM.
Right-click the profile and choose Model Details from the shortcut menu. The Model
Details dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see Parameter
Description of the Model Details Window.
l Copy a profile.
Right-click the profile and choose Copy from the shortcut menu. The profile is copied to
the clipboard of the operating system.
l You can move the cursor to dynamically view the profile analysis information about any
point.
Prerequisites
l The geographic data is imported.
l Base stations are available.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field.
Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage
Probability(%).
The point changes to , which represents a terminal. Then, a line connecting the terminal and
the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the cursor.
Step 5 On the Reception tab page, check the list of cells from which signals can be received and check
the strength of the received signal.
The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending order
from top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reception tab page. The cell that has the highest signal
strength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map.
Keep the cursor at the selected point. Then, you can check the received signal strength of each
cell.
Step 6 Query the statistical information about the selected point on the Results tab page.
----End
Prerequisites
The prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Step 3 Choose Export Results from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Export Results dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see Parameters
for Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Step 5 Optional: You can also select the detailed export contents (such as the name, coverage area,
current coverage percentage, and cumulative coverage percentage) of each counter in Select
Statistics Data.
Step 6 Click Export.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. The file is named in the
following format: Name of the prediction group_Name of the counter.Export format.
Procedure
l Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area.
You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points
in this area.
If... Then...
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
prediction results of a
prediction group
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx
prediction results of a > counter item.
single counter in a
prediction group
You can specify the range of receive level and just export the detailed prediction results of
Bin points in the specified range.
If... Then...
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
prediction results of a
prediction group
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx
prediction results of a > DL RSRP.
single counter in a
prediction group
NOTE
You can set ranges in the property dialog box corresponding to the DL RSRP.
3. Choose Export BIN By > DL RSRP from the shortcut menu.
When you do not select the DL RSRP indicator when performing prediction
calculation, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power.
The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage
area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the
cumulative percentage of the coverage area.
4. Select the range of the DL RSRP.
The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points whose DL
RSRP is within the selected range.
5. Click Export.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. By default, the file is saved
on the desktop of the PC and the default file name is PredictionData.csv.
Prerequisites
l The prediction calculation is complete.
l The printer is properly set.
Choose File > Print Setting. In the displayed Print Setting dialog box, click Printer....
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 3 Select counters to be printed from the prediction group, as shown in Figure 3-32.
Step 5 Choose Batch Print from the shortcut menu. The Batch Print dialog box is displayed.
If you select a polygon, the external rectangle of this polygon is the target area for print.
----End
Prerequisites
l Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has been
imported or created.
l Coverage prediction about the DL RSRP counter has been completed.
l A DT data file has been imported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose DT Adjust Feature Database from the shortcut menu. The
DT Adjust Feature Database dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-33.
Step 4 Set related parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about parameters, see Parameters
for Adjusting the DT Feature Database.
----End
Context
Feature data indicates the geographical distribution of network signals. On an actual network, a
geographical location may be covered by signals from multiple cells. The cell signal strength
and cell information are the signal features of this geographical location. The feature database
contains information about the signal features of all geographical locations on a network. The
MR positioning technology determines the geographical information about the actual
measurement points by matching the actual network coverage information and the feature
database.
This function exports Top N data of all received levels within each lattice and applies only to
single-mode networks.
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.
The dialog box shown in Figure 3-34 is displayed.
Step 4 Set the minimum value and the top N maximum receive levels to be exported.
Step 5 Click Export.
Step 6 Set the save path, file name, and file type. Then, export the preset information.
NOTE
l To use this function successfully, you must select the DL RSRP counter when creating a prediction
group, as shown in Figure 3-35.
l To export top N receive levels within the lattice, you must set TopNSignalLevel when creating a
prediction group. This parameter indicates that the top N maximum receive levels will be calculated,
as shown in Figure 3-36.
----End
Neighbour PDSCH Load Whether the load on the neighboring cell is taken
into account in the calculation.
The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Neighbour PDCCH Load Whether the PDCCH load on the neighboring cell
is taken into account in the calculation.
The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability Probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the
probability that the receive signal strength is
stronger than the specified threshold at the edge
of a cell.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Path Indicates the path to save the data to be exported. You can
click Browse to specify a save path.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Table 3-56 describes the meanings of and relationship between traffic parameters.
MIMO Describes the number of transmit and receive Used to set properties of the
antennas working in multiple input multiple receiver.
output (MIMO) mode and the gains brought on
the capacity by spatial multiplexing.
Mobility Describes the moving speed of a terminal. Used to set the receiver,
Type environment type, and
vector-based traffic map.
Service Describes information about the service model. Used to set the user service
Type type and the traffic map that
is based on cell coverage.
Table 3-57 describes the overall process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-39.
Table 3-58 describes the process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-40.
1 Generating UEs UEs are generated one time for each snapshot and distribute
a certain number of UEs to the specified areas.
NOTE
The UE number and areas are determined by the traffic map.
2 Querying path Query the existing path loss matrix based on the UE
loss geographical location and obtain the path loss values
between the UE and each cell.
3 Calculating The U-Net determines the primary serving cell based on the
relevant highest DL RSRP of each UE. The U-Net also initializes the
counters SINR and noise information about the PDSCH and PUSCH.
7 Processing After the calculation of all the TTIs is complete, the U-Net
statistical results starts to calculate the average value of all the TTIs within the
within a snapshot.
snapshot
Admission load On an actual network, UEs may initiate service requests at any time.
control on the When resources are insufficient and the service satisfaction rate is low,
uplink and UEs cannot connect to the network. When resources are sufficient and
downlink the service satisfaction rate is high, UEs can connect to the network
after the resources are successfully allocated.
In admission control, the system determines whether a UE enters the
scheduling queue or suspending queue based on the RB resource usage
of the system, the packet loss rate of voice services, and the service
satisfaction rate.
Uplink and In scheduling, the U-Net allocates time and frequencies resources for
downlink each UE based on the SINR of the UE channel, requirement on the
scheduling service rate, and terminal power.
Uplink and The LTE system uses the 1 x 3 x 1 frequency reuse mode. All the cells
downlink inter-cell can use all the bandwidths supported by the system. Therefore, inter-
interference cell interference is unavoidable, especially for UEs at the border of a
coordination cell.
(ICIC). In ICIC, the edge band of a cell is separated from that of the adjacent
cell by means of frequency domain coordination. This reduces
interference between adjacent cells and improves performance of UEs
at the border of a cell.
Power control on l In power control on the uplink, the transmit power of UEs is adjusted
the uplink and to control the network interference at a certain level, ensuring the
downlink throughput of UEs at the border of a cell.
l Downlink power control is to adjust the transmit power the eNodeB
sends frequency resources to the UEs.
Uplink and The U-Net obtains the predicted channel status value based on the
downlink scheduling, ICIC, and power control results. Then, the U-Net calculates
measurement the SINR and uses it as the input value for the next TTI.
Processing of The U-Net starts to process the statistical result of the current TTIs only
statistical results when the number of current TTIs exceeds the threshold on the number
within a TTI of TTIs.
NOTE
When the network is started, it is not stable. At this time, the instantaneous result
obtained by the U-Net cannot be used to evaluate the network performance. The
period from the time when the network is started to the time when the network
works stably is called the warm-up period of the network, which can be
automatically identified by the simulation function. To obtain accurate and stable
statistical data, collect statistics after the warm-up period ends.
Threshold on the number of TTIs = Warm-up period/Duration of the TTI =
Warm-up period.
The SFN is supported only when the antenna configuration is 2T2R or 4T4R.
NOTE
Prerequisites
l Traffic parameters are configured.
l Polygons are created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map > Traffic Map(User).
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. See Figure
3-43.
For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on
Environments.
Step 7 Click OK.
The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When setting a capacity simulation group, you can select the created traffic map for the capacity
simulation calculation.
Prerequisites
l Traffic parameters are configured.
l Vector objects are created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Vector.
Step 5 Click Create Map. The Vector Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the vector-based traffic map, such as the number of subscribers for
each service, traffic characteristics, and weight of each clutter.
For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on
Vectors.
Step 7 Click OK.
The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When setting a capacity simulation group, you can select the created traffic map for the capacity
simulation calculation.
Prerequisites
l Traffic parameters are configured.
l The calculation of the Best Server counter is complete.
Context
CAUTION
Users that are generated on the basis of the cell coverage are distributed in the areas specified
by the calculated Best Server of each cell. Therefore, before creating a traffic map based on the
cell coverage, create the prediction group and complete the calculation of the Best Server
counter.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Click Create Map. The New Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Properties dialog box is
displayed.
Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the cell coverage-based traffic map. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Cell Coverage.
The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When setting a capacity simulation group, you can select the created traffic map for the capacity
simulation calculation.
Prerequisites
Traffic parameters are configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
----End
Prerequisites
l The geographic data has been imported.
l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l A calculation area has been created.
l Traffic parameters have been set.
l A traffic map has been configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Group Properties dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Set properties for the simulation group. For details, see Parameters for Creating Traffic
Simulation Groups.
Step 5 Determine whether to calculate the capacity simulation immediately.
NOTE
l The simulation group is automatically locked after the calculation is complete, as shown in Figure
3-45.
l If you right-click the simulation group and choose Stop from the shortcut menu during the calculation,
the simulation group will not be automatically locked.
l The simulation group is automatically unlocked after its properties are modified.
l You can right-click a certain simulation group and choose Group Locked from the shortcut menu to
manually lock the simulation group. In this case, you need to manually unlock the simulation group
before performing capacity simulation again.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the simulation group is created, you can set display properties of this group.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Set the display color for each traffic status and determine whether to display the traffic
status in the legend window.
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. The Group Results dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-46.
Step 4 View the capacity simulation statistics results for each radio access system in the displayed
dialog box. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation
Results of the Entire Network.
----End
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result
of the entire network is displayed.. See Figure 3-47.
Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view statistics on the service requirements and the actual services in
the entire network.
NOTE
l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulation
result of the specified hot spot.
l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again before
viewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.
Step 5 On the Sites(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in the entire network.
Step 6 On the Cells(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in the entire network.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites
(Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively to filter the statistical results.
l To export the simulation statistics on the sites and cells to a .txt, .xls, or .csv file, choose
Action > Export on the Sites(Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively.
l To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tab
page. Then, you can perform the coverage prediction based on the capacity simulation
result.
For detailed operations, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity
Simulation Results.
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a snapshot.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result of a
single snapshot is displayed.
Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view the statistics on the service requirements and actual services in
a single snapshot.
NOTE
l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulation
result of the specified hot spot.
l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again before
viewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.
Step 5 On the Sites tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in a single snapshot.
Step 6 On the Cells tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in a single snapshot.
Step 7 On the Mobiles tab page, view the simulation statistics on subscribers in a single snapshot.
NOTE
l You can also double-click a user icon on the map window to open the User Properties dialog box and view
the simulation statistics of a single subscriber. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing
Capacity Simulation Results of a Single User.
l Red indicates subscribers who are not satisfied with the network (offline, not connected, or no uplink
coverage). Green indicates subscribers who are satisfied with the network.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites, Cells, and
Mobiles tab pages to filter the statistical results.
l To export the simulation statistics on the sites, cells, or subscribers to a .txt, .xls, or .csv
file, choose Action > Export on the Sites, Cells, and Mobiles tab pages.
l To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells tab page. Then,
you can perform the prediction based on the capacity simulation result.
For details, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity Simulation
Results.
Prerequisites
l The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Context
l U-Net classifies simulation users by user status, user type, and mobility type.
l U-Net can display different types of simulation users in different shapes and colors on map.
Procedure
Step 1 Set legends and display properties of capacity simulation.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Symbol dialog box is
displayed.
4. Select the dimension for classifying the simulation users from the Field Type drop-down
list box, as shown in Figure 3-48.
5. Set the legend information for different types of simulation users, such as the shape and
color.
l Table 3-60 classifies the simulation users by user status.
State Description
Satisfied Users that are satisfied with the network quality, that is, users
that are not in any of the following states: ULNoCover,
DLNoCover, NoAccess, and Offline.
ULNoCover Indicates the user that is not covered in the uplink direction.
DLNoCover Indicates the user that is not covered in the downlink direction.
Service Description
Service Description
When simulation users are classified based on user attributes, mobility rates, service types, or terminal
types, you can customize service types.
6. Select Add to Legend.
If the option is selected, the legend information is displayed in the Legend window.
7. Click OK.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the checkbox before Simulations > A simulation group > Network
System > A snapshot > User type.
The map window displays the distribution of users in different states according to the preset
legend shapes and colors in a map.
NOTE
When you move the cursor pointer to a point representing a simulation user, a pop-up message is displayed,
where you can query the detailed information about the simulation user.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can select an area by drawing a polygon and print the capacity simulation result of this area.
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select a counter in the Item area and a display mode in the Figure
Style area.
The CDF or PDF chart corresponding to the selected counter is displayed in the right pane.
NOTE
You can query the PDF or CDF chart of the following 21 counters: IoT(UL), IoT(DL), Load(UL), Load(DL),
Cell MAC Throughput(UL), Cell MAC Throughput(DL), Application Throughput(UL), Application
Throughput(DL), RS SINR(DL), Geometry, User MAC Throughput(UL), User MAC Throughput(DL), User
Application Throughput(UL), User Application Throughput(DL), User Service Time(UL), User Service Time
(DL), User Actual Power, Cell Actual Power, PUSCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, and Throughput.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l To save a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Save Image
As from the shortcut menu.
l To print a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Print from
the shortcut menu.
l To copy a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Copy from
the shortcut menu.
l To export the statistical results of a PDF or CDF chart as a .txt file, click Export Data.
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field.
The point changes to , which represents a terminal. Then, a line connecting the terminal and
the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the cursor.
Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, check the list of cells that can receive signals, strength of
received signals, and uplink or downlink status of the selected position based on the capacity
simulation results.
l In Simulation Group, select a capacity simulation group to simulate the uplink load and
downlink power of the network.
l In Terminal, select a terminal type.
l In Service, select a service type.
l In Mobility, select a mobility type.
The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending order
from top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reference Signal Reception tab page. The cell that has
the highest signal strength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map.
The uplink and downlink status of the selected point is displayed on the right of the tab page.
l The icon indicates that the current channel meets the demodulation requirements.
l The icon indicates that the current channel does not meet the demodulation requirements.
Double-click the two icons, you can query the detailed link information. For detailed description
of parameters, see Parameter Description of the Analysis Detail Window.
----End
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result
of the entire network is displayed.
Step 4 To apply the simulation results to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tab page.
----End
Procedure
l Export capacity simulation results of all simulation groups
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations.
3. Choose Export Result from the shortcut menu.
4. In the Path area of the displayed dialog box, click Browse, and select a path.
5. Select Simulation in Select Export Content to export the capacity simulation results.
6. Select the export objects in Simulation.
7. Click Export.
l Export capacity simulation results of the entire network
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
3. Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu.
4. Select Cells(Average) tab page.
5. Click Action.
6. Select Export.
7. After selecting export fields, export the statistics result.
l Export capacity simulation results of a snapshot
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a
snapshot.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. Select Cells tab page.
5. Click Action.
6. Select Export.
7. After selecting export fields, export the statistics result.
----End
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Table 3-65 Parameters on the General tab page and Transceiver tab page
Parameter Description
Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Name Indicates the name of a traffic map created
according to cell coverage.
Generate user number based on Poisson Indicates whether to generate a user map
based on Poisson distribution.
Parameter Description
traffic map in the New User Location Traffic Map Properties dialog box or modifying
parameters for an existing traffic map based on user locations.
Parameter Description
Genera User Location Traffic Map Indicates the name of a traffic map based on user
l tab Name locations.
page
User Use as X and Y Indicates that the geodetic coordinates are used.
Locati
on tab Use as Longitude and Latitude Indicates that the longitudinal and latitudinal
page coordinates are used.
Parameter Description
Edge User Ratio (%) Ratio of cell edge users used for calculating
the number of cell edge users.
Parameter Description
CAUTION
l The Request pane lists the total number of users attempted to access and the relevant
throughput, and the number of users attempted to access for each service and the relevant
throughput.
l The Result pane lists the total number of actually accessed users and the actual throughput,
and the number of actually accessed users for each service and the relevant throughput.
l If the throughput is less than 1 MB, the unit is kbit/s. If the throughput is greater than or equal
to 1 MB, the unit is Mbit/s.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Resul Total Connected Users Average Users Indicates the average total
ts area number and percentage of
users that actually gain
access to the entire
network.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Total MAC Throughput Indicates the total throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of
(UL)(kbps) a site.
Total Application Indicates the total throughput at the application layer on the
Throughput(UL)(kbps) uplink of a site.
Total MAC Throughput Indicates the total throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink
(DL)(kbps) of a site.
Total Application Indicates the total throughput at the application layer on the
Throughput(DL)(kbps) downlink of a site.
LTEFTP(UL MAC) Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of the
(kbps) FTP service at a site.
LTEFTP(DL MAC) Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of the
(kbps) FTP service at a site.
Parameter Description
LTEVoIP(UL MAC) Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of the
(kbps) VoIP service at a site.
LTEVoIP(DL MAC) Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of the
(kbps) VoIP service at a site.
LTEWebBrowsing(UL Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of the
MAC)(kbps) Web Browsing service at a site.
LTEWebBrowsing(DL Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of the
MAC)(kbps) Web Browsing service at a site.
LTEVideoConferencing Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of the
(UL MAC)(kbps) Video Conferencing service at a site.
LTEVideoConferencing Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of the
(DL MAC)(kbps) Video Conferencing service at a site.
IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the ratio of the sum of interference noise to the noise on
the uplink of a cell. The unit is dB.
Parameter Description
Average Used RB(UL) Indicates the number of uplink RBs in use for a cell.
Number of RBs used in the uplink direction = Overhead of traffic
channels + Overhead of the control channel
Average Used RB(DL) Indicates the number of downlink RBs in use for a cell.
Number of downlink RBs in use = Total number of RBs within
the bandwidth x Downlink load
MAC Throughput(UL) Indicates the uplink average throughput at the MAC layer for a
(kbps) cell.
Application Throughput Indicates the uplink average throughput at the application layer
(UL)(kbps) for a cell.
MAC Throughput(DL) Indicates the downlink average throughput at the MAC layer for
(kbps) a cell.
Service User Indicates the number of users that can gain access to cell services.
Offline User Indicates the number of users involved in call drops in a cell.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
NOTE Max Throughput Maximum throughput of each
The system collects Demand(UL) service required by uplink
the number of
subscribers
subscribers in a single snapshot.
attempting to gain
access and relevant
Min Throughput Demand Minimum throughput of each
throughput for (UL) service required by uplink
services such as subscribers in a single snapshot.
LTEFTP,
LTEVoIP, Average Throughput Average throughput of each
LTEWeb Demand(UL) service required by uplink
Browsing, and subscribers in a single snapshot.
LTEVideo
Conferencing
respectively. This
section generally
describes theses
parameters because
they are the same
for all services.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
ID ID of a user.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
ID ID of a user.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Number Pts Indicates the number of Bin points involved in the statistics.
NOTE
Some parameters in the Model Details window are not described in this table. They are calculated according to
the propagation model.
Reference Signal Power Indicates the power of a single reference signal of the carrier.
Parameter Description
Equipment Loss Indicates the equipment loss on the base station side, including
the feeder loss, jumper loss, and TMA loss.
Down Received Reference Indicates the strength of the reference signal received by
link Signal Level the terminal.
PDSCH Total Noise(I Indicates the sum of the interference power received by the
+N) terminal and the noise power of the terminal.
Reference Signal C/(I Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the reference signal.
+N)
Uplin Received PUSCH Indicates the strength of the signal received by the cell.
k Power
PUSCH Total Noise(I Indicates the sum of the interference power received by the
+N) cell and the noise power of the cell.
PUSCH Peak Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink traffic channel.
Throughput
Principles
In LTE-FDD mode, you can search for cells according to cell groups. That is, you can determine
the ID of the corresponding cell group based on the SSCH and determine the specific cell ID
based on the PSCH.
Considering the networking capability, a large number of cell IDs is preferred. In the case of a
large number of cell IDs, sufficient and high-performance SCHs are required to support quick
and accurate query of cell IDs. Therefore, in LTE-FDD mode, each cell ID group consists of
three cell IDs. Therefore, the number of cell IDs is a multiple of 3. The number of downlink
scrambling codes is a multiple of 6. In the case of the WCDMA network, the maximum number
of cell IDs is 512. Therefore, to ensure that the number of cell IDs is a multiple of both 3 and 6,
the recommended number of cell IDs is 504.
The number of PCIs is limited. Therefore, in the actual network, PCI reuse is unavoidable. The
reuse of PCIs, however, may result in interference when the distance between the cells sharing
the same PCI is excessively small. By using the PCI planning function on the U-Net, you can
plan PCIs properly for cells, reducing the interference between intra-frequency and co-PCI cells.
In the circle, the line between base station A and base station B, that is, line AB, is the diameter.
Line DG and line EF run parallel with line AB. The length of either line OD or OE is one third
of the length of line AB.
The number of base stations involved in the gray area represents the number of layers between
base station A and base station B. If no base station is involved in the gray area, base station A
and base station B are called layer-0 base stations.
Planning PCIs
The U-Net provides the function of planning PCIs. The planning results can be applied to the
cells.
Prerequisites
A base station is created.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: View the PCIs of existing cells.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 4 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-50.
Step 5 In the LTE PCI Planning dialog box, set the planning parameters. For parameter description,
see Parameters for Planning PCIs.
Step 6 Select whether to expand the PCIs based on the existing PCIs.
If... Then...
Expand the PCIs based on the existing Click Load to import the existing PCI cluster
PCIs. configuration file of the network.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the PCI planning is complete, you can filter, verify, apply, and export the PCI planning
result. For details, see Managing the PCI Planning Result.
Prerequisites
The PCI planning is complete.
Procedure
l Perform the following operations as required.
If... Then...
You want to filter PCI 1. Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and
planning result choose Filter from the shortcut menu. For details, see
Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI
Planning Results.
2. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed in green on
the map, as shown in Figure 3-51.
NOTE
l You need to select LTE PCI Planning in the navigation tree
so that the filtered cells can be displayed in green in the map
window.
l If you click None in the Filter dialog box or close the PCI
Planning Display window, the color of filtered cells in the
map window is cleared.
You want to remove the Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and
filter effect on the PCI choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The PCI
planning result Planning Display window switches back to the state when
no filter criterion was used, and the color of cells is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
You want to Audit the PCI Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and
planning result choose Audit from the shortcut menu. For details, see
Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI Planning
Results.
The audit result is saved as an .xls file.
You want to apply the PCI Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and
planning result to each cell choose Commit from the shortcut menu.
PCI values of cells are updated after the PCI planning
result is applied.
You want to export the PCI 1. Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and
planning result choose Export Result from the shortcut menu.
2. Set parameters in the Data Export dialog box. For
details, see 10.17.5 Parameters for Importing and
Exporting Data.
3. Click Export to export the planning result.
If... Then...
You want to view the PCI 1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
values of cells in the map 2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
window
3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed dialog box, add the PCI field to the
Selected Fields area.
5. Click OK.
The PCI values of cells will be displayed in the map
window.
PCI values of cells are updated after the PCI planning
result is applied.
You want to enable the map 1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
window to display the PCI 2. Select LTE PCI Planning in the navigation tree.
planning result together
with that in the planning 3. In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning.
result table 4. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
5. Set parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see Parameters for Setting PCI Display Properties.
6. Click OK.
7. Select a source cell in the map window or click a row
heading in the planning result table.
The PCI planning result is displayed in the map
window and planning result table at the same time.
You want to manually In the PCI Planning Display window, manually modify
modify PCI configurations the value of Confirm Code. Then, right-click in the PCI
Planning Display window and choose Commit from the
shortcut menu.
1. Select a transceiver in the map window.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. In the displayed dialog box, manually modify the PCI
configurations on the LTE-FDDCell tab page.
----End
Planning PRACH
You can manually plan the PRACH parameters of one or multiple cells.
Prerequisites
A base station is created.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) for each cell.
Step 2 Importing the existing neighboring relationships. For details, see Importing Neighbor
Relationships.
Step 6 Set parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameters for Planning the PRACH.
The planning results of the PRACH parameters are displayed in a pane under the U-Net main
interface. You can check the planning results. For details about the parameters, see Parameters
for Viewing PRACH Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If you need to... Then...
Apply the PRACH planning Right-click in the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box
results and choose Commit from the shortcut menu to apply the
PRACH planning results.
The value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index is
submitted.
The value of Min Root Sequence Index is updated after the
PRACH planning results are submitted.
Export the PRACH planning Right-click in the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box
results and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the
PRACH planning results.
Modify the PRACH In the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box, modify the
configurations manually value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index in the table
manually.
The U-Net will automatically change the value of
Confirmed End Root Sequence Index.
The PRACH planning results 1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
are displayed in the map 2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
window.
3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed dialog box, add the Min Root Sequence
Index field to the Selected Fields area.
The cells using PRACH reuse 1. In the navigation tree, select the box in front of LTE
are displayed in the map PRACH Planning.
window. 2. Select a cell in the map window or click the head of a row
in the planning result table.
The selected cell and the cells using PRACH reuse with
the selected cell are displayed in the same color on the
map.
Modify the value of Min Root 1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Sequence Index. 2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
3. Choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu.
4. Modify the value of Min Root Sequence Index.
NOTE
l If you have planned the PRACH parameters of the cell but the
planning results are not submitted, the modification of Min Root
Sequence Index will be synchronized to Existed Min Root
Sequence Index but not to Confirmed Start Root Sequence
Index.
l The value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index is
submitted when you submit the PRACH planning results.
Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency.
Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,
reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments
to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
l Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
Context
l Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
l Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
l Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network
technology.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
----End
Prerequisites
l Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
l In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported
into the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-52.
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameters for Planning Neighboring LTE-FDD Cells.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing
Neighboring Cell Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.
3. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3
Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5. Click OK.
l You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details,
see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can
be displayed in the map window.
View neighboring cell In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.
relationships Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown
in Figure 3-53.
The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are
displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
Filter neighboring cells 1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the
shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see
Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor
Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The
filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as
shown in Figure 3-54.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered
cells in the map window is cleared.
Remove the filter effect Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose
on neighboring cells Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell area
switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the
color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
Audit neighboring cell 1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and
relationships choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet
shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Apply the result of In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from
neighboring cell planning the shortcut menu..
to each cell After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the
original neighboring cell relationships are updated.
Export the result of 1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the
neighboring cell planning shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export
mode.
l Incremental Export: Export only the changed
neighboring cell relationships.
l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships.
3. Click Export.
NOTE
In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the
values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE
network when creating MML scripts.
Delete neighboring cell 1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whose
relationships neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted.
2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm
column of the table in the right pane.
Export the X2 interface This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network.
relationship data The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after the
planning result is applied to each cell.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.
2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the
shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box is
displayed.
3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationship
data needs to be exported.
4. Specify an export path.
5. Click OK.
Clear the result of 1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose
neighboring cell planning Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing result
of neighboring cell planning is cleared.
NOTE
You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the
planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.
----End
adjacent cells, the center areas of all the sites on the network use partial band of the full-
frequency band, and the edge areas use the rest of the full-frequency band.
l 1x3 frequency reuse
In this mode, the network uses three EARFCNs. The three cells in an eNodeB use different
EARFCNs. An eNodeB and its three cells are used as a reuse cluster to implement seamless
coverage of the entire network.
Planning EARFCNs
The U-Net provides the automatic frequency planning function. You can enable the U-Net to
automatically assign EARFCNs to each cell based on different frequency reuse modes to avoid
improper frequency configuration, which greatly reduces the interference problems caused by
improper frequency configuration.
Prerequisites
The frequency band information is set.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose LTE Frequency Planning.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.The Parameter Setting dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-55.
Step 4 On the General tab page, select the target area in Select Area.
l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in
the area.
l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction,
and set whether to match cases.
Step 6 Select a frequency reuse mode in Frequency Reuse Pattern. The default reuse mode is 1x1,
Static ICIC.
Step 7 On the Frequency tab page, select a band in Frequency Band and available ARFCNs in
Channel Index.
You can select only one ARFCN in 1x1 frequency reuse mode and three ARFCNs in 1x3
frequency reuse mode.
After the frequency planning is complete, open the window of frequency planning results. For
detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Frequency Planning
Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l To export the frequency planning results, click Export in the window of frequency planning
results.
l To apply the frequency planning results to the cells, click Commit in the window of
frequency planning results.
Prerequisites
A base station is deployed. ARFCNs are assigned to each cell under the base station.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 3 Choose Frequency Statistics from the shortcut menu. The Frequency Statistics dialog box is
displayed.
Step 5 Click Find to check the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells of the specified ARFCN.
Step 6 Click Geometry to query the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells on the map.
Click Color to set the display colors of intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells.
----End
The purpose of this function is to improve the network coverage range, control and reduce inter-
cell interference, and expand the network capacity, while ensuring signal receive quality. If the
live network coverage does not meet requirements, you can enable this function to automatically
adjust cell parameters to optimize the coverage.
Prerequisites
l Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has been
imported or created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose Calculate LinkLoss Matrix from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 3-56.
Step 4 Set related parameters in the Calculate LinkLoss Matrix dialog box. For details about
parameters, see Setting Link Matrix Parameters.
Step 5 Click Run to start calculating pass loss, as shown in Figure 3-57.
----End
Planning Cells
This section describes how to plan cells. Before planning cells, you need to set parameters such
as analysis and simulation areas, number of iteration times, weight of each coverage counter
(such as RSRP and RS SINR), and maximum adjustment range of the antenna tilt angle,
azimuth, and reference signal transmit power.
Prerequisites
l Base stations have been created.
l Analysis and simulation areas have been created.
l The link matrix planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose New from the shortcut menu. The LTE Cell
Planning dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-58.
Step 4 Set cell planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about the parameters, see
Parameters for Creating an LTE Cell Planning Group.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After creating an LTE cell planning group, you can plan LTE cells.
1. In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
2. Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree.
3. Right-click Groupx and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu. The system starts
planning LTE cells, as shown in Figure 3-59.
NOTE
You can right-click Groupx and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating LTE cell groups.
When LTE cells are being planned, the Event Viewer window in the lower part of the U-Net main window
displays the planning progress.
After LTE cells are planned, you can view the planning result. For details, see Viewing the LTE
Cell Planning Result.
Prerequisites
l Links have been calculated.
l LTE cell planning groups have been created and calculated.
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click Groupx and choose Result from the shortcut menu. The LTE Cell Planning:
Groupx dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, view the LTE cell planning result, as shown in Figure 3-60. For
details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing LTE Cell Planning Results.
NOTE
On the Cells tab page in the LTE Cell Planning :Groupx dialog box, click Commit to apply the cell
planning result to each cell.
----End
Planning Neighbor based on Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring
existed Neighbors relationships.
If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring
relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are
replanned.
Reference Site Distance(m) Sets the distance difference between the cell to be planned
and the referenced cell.
Parameter Description
Cell Edge Coverage Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This
Probability(%) parameter is valid only when shadow fading is imposed. The
value of the parameter is directly proportional to the value
of shadow fading.
This parameter is valid only when the network planning
scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Table 3-73 Parameters displayed on the Inter-RAT tab page (available in multi-mode)
Parameter Description
Co-Site Distance Indicates the co-site distance. The default value is CAUTION
30 km. On the General
tab page, if you
If the distance between two base stations is less than select a network
or equal to the value of this parameter, the cells planning mode
under the two base stations are considered as co-site (Methods
cells. Select), the
required
If two base stations in LTE-FDD and GSM/UMTS conditions must
networks are equipped with multiple antennas (or be met so that you
repeaters), the cells under the two base stations are can use the cell as
considered as co-site cells only if the distances a neighboring
LTE-FDD cell for
between all antennas (or repeaters) of the LTE-FDD blind handover.
base station and antennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/ For details, see
UMTS base station are less than or equal to the Table 3-74.
value of this parameter.
Parameter Description
Min Signal Level Indicates the minimum signal receive level. The
(dBm) default value is 110 dBm.
The signal receive level of the LTE-FDD cell must
be less than the preset Min Signal Level(dBm)
value.
Min Signal Level Indicates the minimum signal receive level of the inter-RAT neighboring
(dBm) cell.
The Topology A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTE-
mode is selected FDD cell must meet the following conditions:
l Co-Site Distance
l Co-Transceiver Azimuth Difference
l Min Signal Level(dBm)
The Prediction A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTE-
mode is selected FDD cell must meet the following conditions:
l Co-Site Distance
l Best Handover Area Percent
NOTE
If there are repeaters, neighboring cell planning based on predictions is not
supported.
Fit Neighbor Cell Visible Displays the neighboring relationships of a cell on the
map after you select the cell in the neighboring
relationship table.
Legend Description
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can
view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
Table 3-77 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Missing Co-Site Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.
List > No: Filters the neighboring cells whose neighboring cells are
more than the specified value.
Percentage of Reference Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share the
Neighbors neighboring relationships with the GSM cells at the same
site as the UMTS cells.
Same PCI Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This
parameter is available only for the LTE network.
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific
network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Cause Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell
of the serving cell.
l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the
network.
l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships.
l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added
by users.
l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships.
Parameter Description
11 Result Edge Frequency Indicates the allocation mode of the uplink edge
dialog box (UL) frequency band. The value can be Style1, Style2, or
Style3.
NOTE
When the downlink six edge frequency band allocation
modes are used, the uplink edge frequency band mode has
no output.
Parameter Description
PCI Mod 3 Matching Azimuth order Allocate PCI Mod 3 based on azimuth order.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability Set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell
Edge Coverage Probability(%).
This parameter is valid only when shadow
fading is taken into account. The value of the
parameter is directly proportional to the value
of shadowing fading.
Parameter Description
Suggest Code Indicates the suggested PCI value and also the planned PCI
value.
Parameter Description
Min Reuse Distance(m) Indicates the minimum reuse distance of PCI in the current
line. No Reuse indicates that the PCI is not reused.
Min Reuse Tier Indicates the minimum reuse tier of PCI in the current line.
No Reuse indicates that the PCI is not reused.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Propagation Radius Factor Conversion factor for the Calculation radius of a propagation
model.
Coverage Radius Cell radius is calculated based on the signal coverage of cells.
Min Signal Level(dBm) Minimum receive level of signals for cell coverage.
Shadowing taken into account Whether to consider shadow fading when calculating signal
coverage of cells.
Cell Edge Coverage Cell edge coverage probability used for calculating shadow
Probability(%) fading.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Ncs Indicates the cyclic shift, that is, the configuration of zero-
correlated cells allocated for a cell.
The value of this parameter is a result of the PRACH
planning. The possible values of this parameter are as
follows:
l High-speed cell: 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 55, 68, 82,
100, 128, 158, 202, or 237.
l Low-speed cell: 0, 13, 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 59,
76, 93, 119, 167, 279, or 419.
Existed Min Root Sequence Indicates the existing start ZC root sequence index of the
Index cell.
Suggested Start Root Sequence Indicates the planned start ZC root sequence index of the
Index cell.
Suggested End Root Sequence Indicates the planned end ZC root sequence index of the
Index cell.
Confirmed Start Root Sequence Indicates the confirmed start ZC root sequence index.
Index
Confirmed End Root Sequence Indicates the confirmed end ZC root sequence index.
Index
Reuse Tier (Topology) Indicates the minimum number of reuse tiers based on the
geographical location.
Reuse Distance(m) Indicates the PARCH reuse distance, that is, the minimum
reuse distance when the same root sequence is reused.
Reuse Tier (Neighbor) Indicates the minimum number of reuse tiers based on
neighboring relationship.
Actual Required Reuse Tier Indicates the actually required number of reuse tiers when
(Neighbor) resources are allocated to cells.
Lower Reuse Tier (Neighbor) Indicates whether the number of reuse tiers is reduced
when resources are allocated to cells.
Parameter Description
Select PCI type Selects the PCI results to be displayed in the map window.
Parameter Description
Same MOD3 Indicates the cells that have the same PCI mode 3 with the
specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations.
Same MOD6 Indicates the cells that have the same PCI mode 6 with the
specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations.
Parameter Description
Altitude(m) Altitude.
Use Altitude For Calculation Whether to manually type the altitude of a site
for calculation. If this item is selected, you
need to type the altitude of a site manually.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Cell Edge Coverage Probability Indicates the cell edge coverage. The default
value is 75%.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when shadow
fading is imposed.
Parameter Description
Azimuth Step Size() Indicates the step length at which the antenna
azimuth is adjusted. The value range is from
-360 to 360.
Tilt Step Size() Indicates the step length at which the antenna
tile angle is adjusted. The value range is from
-90 to 90.
RS Power Step Size(dBm) Indicates the step length at which the cell
transmit power is adjusted. The value range
is from 0 to 46.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actual
network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating
base stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parameters
and predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements on
network planning in different scenarios.
Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic
parameters are defined before capacity prediction.
4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template
to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters
separately.
4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction
By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and
channel quality.
4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation
Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as
follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and
allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall
network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net
generates a statistical report.
4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters
This section describes how to properly plan the frequencies, PCIs, and PRACH channels of the
LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.
4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,
or site equipment.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
6 Setting NE You can import existing base station data to create base
parameters stations or use a base station template to automatically
create base stations. You can also create sites,
transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 4.7
Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters.
7 Calculating the path The method for calculating the path loss for different
loss network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details,
see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
10 Creating a traffic The method for creating a traffic map for LTE-FDD and
map LTE-TDD network on the U-Net is the same. For details,
see 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps.
Context
l Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
l One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Save a project file.
Choose File > Save or click to save all the information about the project in a project
file.
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l Open an existing project file.
Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.
NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Context
The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes
(QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD.
Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed.
Step 4 Click the blank row (marked with *) in the dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-3. For information
on how to set a new MCS type, see Table 4-2.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Coding Rate Indicates the coding rate. The value range is from 0 to
2.
----End
Context
For an LTE-TDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideo
Conferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
If... Then...
Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services >
LTE-TDD.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 4-4.
3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table
4-3.
Modify an existing 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services >
service type LTE-TDD > the existing service type.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify the parameters for the existing service type by referring
to Table 4-3.
Priority Service priority weighting factor, which is used to adjust the service
priority for subscribers in capacity simulation.
1 indicates the lowest priority.
Parameter Description
MAC PDU(kbit) Size of a packet for transmitting CS service data at the MAC layer.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-TDD.
Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set the name of a receiver.
If... Then...
Create a receiver type. In a blank row marked with *, type the name of the new
receiver and select type of MCS Table.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parameters
for the receiver type by referring to Table 4-4.
If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed.
Step 6 Click OK.
IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate. The value range is from 0
to 100.
Parameter Description
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
If... Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
type LTE-TDD.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. See Table 4-5 to set the parameters of a new terminal type.
Modify an 1. On the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
existing terminal LTE-TDD > Existing Terminals.
type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. See Table 4-5 to modify the parameters of an existing terminal type.
Parameter Meaning
Parameter Meaning
Number of Transmission Antenna Ports Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter
for a terminal.
Number of Reception Antenna Ports Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver
for a terminal.
----End
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For
details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see
3.6.6 Setting User Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,
see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l View base station templates.
2. The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
For example, .
l Create a base station template.
1. Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then,
a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
2. Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameters for Setting
LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.
3. Click OK.
l View and modify properties of the base station template.
1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see
Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.
4. Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same
way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 On the LTE-TDDCell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the LTE-TDD
cell, as shown in Figure 4-6. For parameter description, see Parameters of LTE-TDD Cells.
----End
Use Altitude For Calculation Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for
calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the
altitude of a site for calculation.
Comments Description.
Parameter Description
Comments Description.
General Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter Description
Max Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit is dBm.
Actual Load(DL) Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value ranges
from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL) Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Target IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the target ratio of the sum of interference and noise
to the volume of increased noise on the uplink.
Actual IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the actual Interface Over Thermal (IoT) on the
uplink.
Parameter Description
Priority Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is,
the higher the priority of the cell is.
Advance Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Edge Frequency Style(UL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2,
or Style3).
Edge Frequency Style(DL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
in the downlink.
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state
is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3).
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the following
4 states and 11 modes are supported: Reuse3 (Style1,
Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a,
Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full power Reuse1
(AllPowerReuse1), and low power Reuse1
(LowPowerReuse1).
l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state,
the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all users
and the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameter
is set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in
the cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter is
set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the
cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Control Channel Overhead l Uplink area: Indicates the number of resource blocks
(RBs) on the uplink control channels. The value range is
from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of
RBs of the entire bandwidth.
l Downlink area: Indicates the number of orthogonal
frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the
downlink PDCCH.
Parameter Description
RS SINR Access Threshold Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)
(DL)(dB) access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit is
dB.
Power Offset Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter Description
PBCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power
of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and
the unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power
of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and
the unit is dB.
PCFICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PCFICH power relative
to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from
-15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PDCCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative
to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from
-15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PHICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PHICH power relative to the power
of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The
unit is dB.
Parameter Description
CCU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by
users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RS
power.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -6.
CEU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by
users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.
PB(dB) Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols
of the RE relative to the RSRE power. The value can be 0,
1, 2, or 3.
Propagation Models Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter Description
Value Description
TM3 Indicates the open-loop space reuse, which is used for the
eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM4 Indicates the closed-loop space reuse, which is used for the
eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
Value Description
Parameter Description
Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges
from 0 to 1.
Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value
ranges from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL) Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges
from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(DL) Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value
ranges from 0 to 1.
PBCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the
power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the
power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
Actual IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the actual Interface Over Thermal (IoT) on the
uplink.
High Speed Indicates the speed in a cell. This parameter can be set
to one of the following values:
l LowSpeed
l HighSpeed
l HighwaySpeed
Parameter Description
Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends on
the neighbor relationship).
The value of this parameter must be an integer larger
than 0.
RS SINR Access Threshold(DL) Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio
(dB) (SINR) access threshold of the downlink reference
signal. The unit is dB.
Priority Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell
is, the higher the priority of the cell is.
PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Indicates the minimum PCI reuse tiers (depends on the
neighbor relationship).
Parameter Description
CCU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received
by users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the
RS power.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is
-6.
CEU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received
by users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the
RS power.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is
-1.77.
Parameter Description
VIP For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameters
cannot be changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt,
and pilot power.
Azimuth Min. Value Minimum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value
ranges from -360 to 360.
The default value is -20.
Azimuth Max. Value Maximum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value
ranges from -360 to 360.
The default value is 20.
Parameter Description
Electronic Downtilt Min. Value Minimum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The
value ranges from -90 to 90.
The default value is -10.
Electronic Downtilt Max. Value Maximum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The
value ranges from -90 to 90.
The default value is 14.
RsPower Min. Value(dB) Minimum adjustment range of the pilot power. The
value ranges from 0 to 46.
The default value is 10.
RsPower Max. Value(dB) Maximum adjustment range of the pilot power. The
value ranges from 0 to 46.
The default value is 20.
Comments Description.
Neighbours list Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button.
For details, see Table 4-10.
TM3 Indicates the open-loop space reuse, which is used for the
eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM4 Indicates the closed-loop space reuse, which is used for the
eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
Edge Frequency Style(UL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1,
Style2, or Style3).
Edge Frequency Style(DL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
in the downlink.
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state
is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3).
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the following
4 states and 11 modes are supported: Reuse3 (Style1,
Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a,
Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full power Reuse1
(AllPowerReuse1), and low power Reuse1
(LowPowerReuse1).
l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state,
the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all users
and the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameter
is set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in
the cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter is
set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in
the cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Parameter Description
Edge Frequency Style Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users
on the uplink and downlink.
Control Channel Overhead l Uplink area: Indicates the number of resource blocks
(RBs) on the uplink control channels. The value range is
from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of
RBs of the entire bandwidth.
l Downlink area: Indicates the number of orthogonal
frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the
downlink PDCCH.
Target IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the target ratio of the sum of interference and noise
to the volume of increased noise on the uplink.
Parameter Description
Hexagon Radius(m) Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value
ranges from 1 to 100000.
l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the
radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius
(m) in the current site template by default.
l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in
the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty
by default.
Parameter Description
Dx(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Parameter Description
Azimuth Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit
is degree.
Parameter Description
Input Total Loss l If you select the check box, you need to manually type
the total loss.
l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total
loss.
TMA
Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click to
modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m) Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB) Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
Parameter Description
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB) Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and
miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
NOTE
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the
corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut
menu.
Table 4-15 lists the LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Coverage by Best Server Cell with the highest DL RSRP among the cells that
Signal Level receive downlink signals.
(DL)
DL RSRP Strength of single downlink reference signal (RS)
received from the primary serving cell.
PDSCH Signal Level Indicates the received power of the traffic channel
RE.
DL ICIC Zone Downlink ICIC area, that is, the downlink central
area and edge area that meet the downlink ICIC
threshold.
UL ICIC Zone Indicates the uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplink
central area and edge area that meet the uplink ICIC
threshold.
Coverage by PUSCH MCS The highest MCS supported by the uplink PUSCH.
MCS(UL)
1 Traversing all the cells Determine whether the cells in the calculation area are
activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction
counters of this cell are not calculated.
2 Obtaining the path l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate the
loss matrix path loss matrix.
l If the path loss matrix exists, it can be obtained
directly.
3 Querying the antenna You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain,
gain, equipment loss, equipment loss, and penetration loss during the
and penetration loss calculation of link loss.
4 Predicting slow fading To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with
by using the a certain probability. Certain power of the base station
shadowing margin is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reserved
power is called shadowing margin.
You can enable the U-Net to take the shadowing
margin into account during the calculation of link loss.
6 Calculating the power You can calculate the power of interference noises and
of interference noises determine the handover area.
to determine the
handover area
7 Determining the target If a cell in the calculation area is an SFN cell, you must
RRU in the uplink determine the target RRU of the cell in the uplink.
Loss caused by the Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to
human body the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Path loss Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Penetration loss Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles,
and leaves.
Total loss of the base Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
station feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l Propagation models are assigned to cells.
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l Calculation
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
Calculate forcibly Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path
Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
Step 5 Query the calculation results
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Context
l In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters:
DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH
SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL
RS SINR.
l In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,
PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
l In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for
the following predication counters:
Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
l In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set
for the following predication counters:
CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/
Nt.
l In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to
be set for the following predication counters:
Coverage By CIR.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display
dialog box is displayed.
The map information is Click Default Value to change the default values of parameters
not imported under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard
Deviation.
The map information is Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parameters
imported under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard
Deviation.
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
----End
Prerequisites
l A U-Net project is already created.
l The geographic data is imported.
l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5. Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6. Click OK.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD
Prediction Counters.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see
4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.
Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Prerequisites
l The geographic data is imported.
l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialog
box is displayed.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD
Prediction Counters.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see
4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.
Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the number
of cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to view
details.
Procedure
l View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction
Statistical Results (on a Map).
l View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing
Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
Context
The method of analyzing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as
that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction
Result.
Context
The methods of exporting and printing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode
are the same as those for networks in the LTE-FDD mode.
Procedure
l Export prediction results in batches. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in
Batches.
l Export the detailed prediction result by Bin point. For details, see Exporting the Detailed
LTE-FDD Prediction Result by Bin Point.
l Print prediction results in batches. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in
Batches.
----End
Context
The method of verifying the feature database based on DT data in LTE-TDD is similar to that
in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on
DT Data.
Context
The method of exporting the feature database in LTE-TDD is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For
detailed operations, see 3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability Probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the
probability that the receive signal strength is
stronger than the specified threshold at the
edge of a cell.
Parameter Description
Context
The method of capacity simulation for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that for
networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.
Context
For PCI planning, see 3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning.
Context
The method of planning PRACH parameters for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same
as that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning.
Context
The method for planning neighboring cells in LTE-TDD network is the same as that in LTE-
FDD network. For details, see 3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning.
Context
For frequency planning, see 3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.
Context
For details about the LTE cell automatic planning, see 3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE
Cells.
The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell
parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your
network planning requirements.
environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. You
must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction.
5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template
to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters
separately.
5.8 GSM Prediction
By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and
channel quality.
5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning
After creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. You
can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each
cell one by one.
5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the U-
Net.
5.11 TSC Planning
This section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created,
you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based,
and VAMOS-based TSC planning.
5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning
4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,
or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment
for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
6 Setting NE You can import existing base station data to create base
parameters stations or use a base station template to automatically
create base stations. You can also create sites,
transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 5.7
Setting GSM NE Parameters.
7 Calculating the path For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
loss
Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM,
UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
Context
l Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
l One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-2.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Save a project file.
Choose File > Save or click to save all the information about the project in a project
file.
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l Open an existing project file.
Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.
NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM.
Step 3 Right-click and then choose MOS from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-3. The MOS
Table dialog box is displayed
Step 4 Set related parameters to create or modify MOS types by referring to Table 5-2.
You can set the new MOS type in the blank line (marked with *) of the dialog box.
Parameter Meaning
Parameter Meaning
----End
Context
The U-Net provides three default GSM service types: GSMVoice, GSMMobile Internet
Access, and GSMMultimedia Messaging Service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
Option Description
If... Then...
Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >
Services > GSM.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-4.
3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to
Table 5-3.
Modify an existing service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >
Services > GSM > An existing service type.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by
referring to Table 5-3.
Priority Indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services. The
weighting factor is assigned depending on the service priority.
The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.
FER(%) Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.
Parameter Meaning
IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0 to
100.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > GSM.
Create a receiver type. Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (marked
with *) in the dialog box. Set Link Type.
Step 5 Double-click the first column of the receiver and set property parameters in the displayed dialog
box. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 5-4.
Parameter Meaning
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
type GSM.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 5-5.
Modify an 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
existing terminal GSM > An existing terminal type.
type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table
5-5.
Number of Transmission Antennas Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for
a terminal.
Parameter Meaning
Number of Reception Antennas Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a
terminal.
----End
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,
see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l View base station templates.
2. The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
Such as .
l Create a base station template.
1. Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then,
a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
2. Set properties of the BTS template. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
3. Click OK.
l View and modify properties of the base station template.
1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
4. Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same
way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio
links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of
different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-6.
Step 4 Set the properties of GSM cells on the GSMTRX tab page. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells.
----End
Use Altitude For Calculation Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for
calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the
altitude of a site for calculation.
Comments Description.
Comments Description.
Parameter Description
IoT Target(UL) Indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) on the
uplink.
Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range is
from 0 to 1.
Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is
from 0 to 1.
Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab Page
Parameter Description
Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value
range is from 0 to 1.
Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value
range is from 0 to 1.
Coverage Type Indicates the cell coverage type used during capacity
planning.
Parameter Description
Max TRX Number Indicates the number of TRXs that can be configured
in a cell.
Parameter Description
VAMOS Main TSC Indicates the primary training sequence code for
VAMOS.
VAMOS Sub TSC Indicates the secondary training sequence code for
VAMOS.
Comments Description.
Hexagon Radius(m) Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value
ranges from 1 to 100000.
l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the
radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius
(m) in the current site template by default.
l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in
the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty
by default.
Parameter Description
Dx(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Azimuth Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit
is degree.
Input Total Loss l If you select the check box, you need to manually type
the total loss.
l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total
loss.
Parameter Description
TMA
Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click to
modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m) Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB) Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB) Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and
miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
NOTE
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the
corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut
menu.
Table 5-10 lists the GSM prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Coverage by DL BCCH Signal Indicates the strength of the downlink BCCH signals
Signal Level Level received by a terminal.
(DL)
Best Server Indicates the cell that has the strongest DL BCCH
signal strength among the cells that receive downlink
signals.
DL TCH Signal Level Indicates the strength of the downlink traffic signals
received by a terminal.
Coverage by UL Service CIR Indicates the receive quality of the uplink TCH/
C/(I+N) PDCH.
Level(UL)
Coverage Coding Scheme Indicates the best coding scheme that you can select
Area according to channels.
Analysis
MOS Indicates the mean opinion score (MOS), which is
used for assessing voice quality.
Coverage by DL PDCH MAC Peak Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink
Throughput Throughput PDCH at the MAClayer.
(DL)
DL PDCH Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink
Application Peak PDCH at the application layer.
Throughput
Coverage by UL PDCH MAC Peak Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCH
Throughput Throughput at the MAC layer.
(UL)
UL PDCH Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCH
Application Peak at the application layer.
Throughput
1 Traversing all the cells Determines whether the cells in the calculation area
are activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction
counters of this cell are not calculated.
2 Obtaining the path l If the path loss matrix does not exist, it needs to be
loss matrix calculated.
l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can be
directly obtained.
3 Querying the antenna You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain,
gain, equipment loss, equipment loss, and penetration loss during the
and penetration loss calculation of link loss.
4 Predicting slow fading To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with
by using the shadow a certain probability, certain power of the base station
fading margin is reserved against the shadow fading. The reserved
power is called shadowing margin.
You can enable the U-Net to consider the shadowing
margin during the calculation of link loss.
6 Calculating the power You can calculate the power of interference noises and
of interference noises determine the handover area.
to determine the
handover area
7 Calculating counters You can calculate the required counters and custom
of traffic channels and counters such as DL BCCH Rx Power, Best Server,
common channels power of interference noises, and handover area of Bin
based on the Bin points.
points
The formulas for calculating uplink loss and downlink loss are as follows:
l Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain
of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
l Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna
gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are
included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss
which is included into the total loss of the base station.
Table 5-12 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.
Loss caused by the Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to
human body the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Path loss Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Penetration loss Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles,
and leaves.
Total loss of the base Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
station feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l Calculation
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
Calculate forcibly Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path
Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event
Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown
in Figure 5-9.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Context
l In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters:
DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH
SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL
RS SINR.
l In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,
PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
l In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for
the following predication counters:
Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
l In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set
for the following predication counters:
CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/
Nt.
l In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to
be set for the following predication counters:
Coverage By CIR.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display
dialog box is displayed.
The map information is Click Default Value to change the default values of parameters
not imported under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard
Deviation.
The map information is Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parameters
imported under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard
Deviation.
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
----End
Prerequisites
l A U-Net project is already created.
l The geographic data is imported.
l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5. Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6. Click OK.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-10.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction
Counters.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.For parameter description, see
5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups.
Step 7 Click OK.
Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Procedure
l View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction
Statistical Results (on a Map).
l View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing
Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.
Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.
Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
2. Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3. Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left.
NOTE
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors
on the map window.
l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4. Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5. View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.
----End
Example
This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.
The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna
downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. Click Antenna Config tab Page.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the
two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.
Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the
recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.
To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure
l To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from
the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
l To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut
menu.
l To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut
menu.
Context
The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems
from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Procedure
l Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area.
You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points
in this area.
If... Then...
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
prediction results of a
prediction group
If... Then...
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx
prediction results of a > counter item.
single counter in a
prediction group
You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a
Bin point within the range.
If... Then...
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
prediction results of a
prediction group
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx
prediction results of a > DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal
single counter in a Level.
prediction group
NOTE
You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.
3. Choose Export BIN By > DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal Level from
the shortcut menu.
When you perform prediction calculation, select at least one of the preceding two
indicators. Otherwise, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power.
The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage
area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the
cumulative percentage of the coverage area.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator.
The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified
range.
5. Click Export.
l Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable
only to single-mode networks.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > DL BCCH Signal Level.
3. Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.The dialog box
as shown in Figure 5-11 is displayed.
4. Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N
records to be exported.
5. Click Export.
6. After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data.
NOTE
l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include DL BCCH Signal
Level when you create a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-12.
l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of
TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-13. This value
specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents.
Context
The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the U-
Net is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.
Prerequisites
l The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or
created.
l The coverage prediction for DL BCCH Signal Level is complete.
l The DT data file has been imported.
Context
The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For
detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.
Context
For detailed operations of exporting the feature database in GSM, see Export the top N records
of the reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Result
by Bin Point.
Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,
reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments
to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
l Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
Context
l Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
l Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
l Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network
technology.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
----End
Prerequisites
l Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
l In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported
into the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-14.
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window. For detailed description of parameters, see 5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing
Neighboring Cell Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
3. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3 Parameters
for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5. Click OK.
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can
be displayed in the map window.
View neighboring cell In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.
relationships Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown
in Figure 5-15.
The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are
displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
Filter neighboring cells 1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the
shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see
5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter
Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.
3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The
filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as
shown in Figure 5-16.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered
cells in the map window is cleared.
Remove the filter effect Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose
on neighboring cells Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell area
switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the
color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
Audit neighboring cell 1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and
relationships choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter
Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.
3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet
shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Apply the result of In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from
neighboring cell planning the shortcut menu..
to each cell After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the
original neighboring cell relationships are updated.
Export the result of 1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the
neighboring cell planning shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export
mode.
l Incremental Export: Export only the changed
neighboring cell relationships.
l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships.
3. Click Export.
NOTE
In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the
values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE
network when creating MML scripts.
Delete neighboring cell 1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whose
relationships neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted.
2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm
column of the table in the right pane.
Export the X2 interface This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network.
relationship data The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after the
planning result is applied to each cell.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.
2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the
shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box is
displayed.
3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationship
data needs to be exported.
4. Specify an export path.
5. Click OK.
Clear the result of 1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose
neighboring cell planning Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing result
of neighboring cell planning is cleared.
NOTE
You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the
planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.
----End
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Cell Edge Coverage Probability Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, that
is, the probability that the receive signal strength is
stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a
cell.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Planning Neighbor based Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring
on existed Neighbors relationships.
If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring
relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are replanned.
Co-Site Distance(m) Configures the two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells when
the distance between the two cells is smaller than the value of this
parameter.
Swapped out cells taken Indicates whether swapped-out cells need to be planned.
into planning
Azimuth Difference() Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be planned
and the cells used for reference.
Reference Site Distance Indicates the distance difference between the site of the cells to
(m) be planned and the site of the cells used for reference.
Consider Handover Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path for
Statistics saving the handover data.
Parameter Description
Planning Weight Indicates the weight of the planning result upon neighboring cell
ranking.
Handover Statistics Indicates the weight of the handover data upon neighboring cell
Weight ranking.
Cell Edge Coverage Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This parameter
Probability(%) is valid only when shadow fading is considered. The value of this
parameter is directly proportional to the value of shadowing
fading.
This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario
is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Compute Indoor Loss Indicates whether the penetration loss is considered in the
calculation.
This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario
is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Parameter Description
Table 5-18 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring
cell planning)
Parameter Description
SourceNetType Indicates the system that the source cell belongs to.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Fit Neighbor Cell Visible Displays the neighboring relationships of a cell on the
map after you select the cell in the neighboring
relationship table.
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can
view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based
on Neighboring Relations
This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor
relationships and filtering neighboring cells.
Table 5-21 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells
Parameter Description
Missing Co-Site Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.
List > No: Filters the neighboring cells whose neighboring cells are
more than the specified value.
Percentage of Reference Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share the
Neighbors neighboring relationships with the GSM cells at the same
site as the UMTS cells.
Same PCI Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This
parameter is available only for the LTE network.
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific
network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Cause Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell
of the serving cell.
l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the
network.
l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships.
l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added
by users.
l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships.
performance can be improved. The IBCA feature improves channel quality by reducing the
interference traffic. Therefore, TSCs need to be configured to ensure the minimum of
interference traffic of the same TSC station. Manual configuration of TSCs is complicated. In
this case, the U-Net is required.
Prerequisites
Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, click TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click TSC Planning and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu, as shown
in Figure 5-17.
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.1 Parameters for
TSC Planning.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Set the color of cells displayed in the map window for different TSC planning modes.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. On the displayed Operation tab page, click TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
3. Right-click TSC Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed TSC Display Options dialog box, set the color of cells displayed in
the map window for different TSC planning modes. For details, see 5.12.5 Parameters
for Setting the TSC Display Effect.
5. Click OK.
Prerequisites
The TSC planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click TSC Planning and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure
5-18.
Apply the TSC planning result to each cell 1. Right-click in the TSC Planning
Display window and choose Commit
from the shortcut menu.
2. NE data is updated automatically after the
TSC planning result is applied.
NOTE
l In the TSC Planning Display window, if you
modify the values in the Confirm
VamosMainTSC column, the values in the
Confirm VamosSubTSC and Confirm TSC
Group columns change accordingly.
l In the main window of the U-Net, a message
indicating whether the data is submitted
successfully is displayed in the Event
Viewer docked window in the lower part.
Alternatively, you can access the GSM Cell
Table tab page and check whether data is
changed. If data on the GSM Cell Table tab
page is changed, the data has been submitted
successfully.
Enable the map window and the planning 1. In the TSC Planning Display window,
result table to display the TSC planning result click a row heading. Alternatively, click a
simultaneously certain cell in the map window.
2. Information about the selected cell is
displayed in the map window and the
planning result table in the right pane of
the TSC Planning Display window
simultaneously, as shown in Figure
5-19.
NOTE
You need to select TSC Planning in the
navigation tree so that the selected cell can be
displayed in the map window.
Enable the U-Net to display or hide certain 1. In the right pane of the TSC Planning
columns Display window, right-click a certain
table heading and choose Display
Columns from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed Columns to be
displayed dialog box, select or clear the
check boxes of columns to be displayed or
hidden.
NOTE
You can right-click a certain table heading in the
TSC Planning Display window and choose Hide
Columns from the shortcut menu to hide the
selected column.
----End
Prerequisites
l Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
l The parameters MA and MAIO Plan have been configured for the cells.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation
tree.
Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 5-20.
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.3 Parameters for
IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.
Step 5 Click Run.
l You can right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor on the Operation tab page and choose
Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells.
l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For
details, see 5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring
Cell Planning.
----End
Prerequisites
The planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation
tree.
NOTE
You need to select IBCA Interference Neighbor so that the IBCA interference neighboring cell
relationships can be displayed in the map window.
Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The
IBCA Interference Neighbor window is displayed.
If... Then...
You want to export the result of IBCA 1. In the IBCA Interference Neighbor
interference neighboring cell planning window, right-click in the left pane and
choose Export from the shortcut menu, as
shown in Figure 5-21.
2. Set parameters in the displayed Data
Export dialog box. For details, see
Parameters in the Data Export Dialog
Box.
3. Click Export.
4. Set the file format and file name and
specify the saving path. Then, click
Save.
After the data is exported to a file, you can
open it to view and modify the data.
You want to enable the map window to 1. In the IBCA Interference Neighbor
display the result of IBCA interference window, click a cell in the left pane.
neighboring cell planning together with that Alternatively, click a certain cell in the
in the planning result table map window.
2. In the right pane of the IBCA
Interference Neighbor window, the
interference neighboring cells of the
selected cell is displayed in the map
window and the planning result table at
the same time, as shown in Figure 5-22.
----End
Parameter Description
Planning TSC based on existed TSC If this item is selected, TSC planning is
performed based on existing TSCs.
Parameter Description
Site ID ID of a site.
CI ID of a cell.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
CI ID of a cell.
Parameter Description
Co-TSCCell Color Indicates the color of cells with the same TSC
value as that of the source cell in the TSC
planning.
The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells and
scrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to
meet you network planning requirements.
6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning
This section describes the process of UMTS network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning a UMTS network by using the U-Net.
6.2 Creating a Project
This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for
different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template.
Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM,
UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
6.3 Importing Geographic Data
You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems.
You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing
geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.
6.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands
The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a
propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The
method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on
the U-Net is the same.
6.5 Adding a Device
You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for
creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters
Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,
environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution.
Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map.
6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template
to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters
separately.
6.8 UMTS Prediction
By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and
channel quality.
6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells
After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network.
You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for
each cell one by one.
6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning
This section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used for
differentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling code
planning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping and
vertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenarios
such as scrambling code check and network deployment.
6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis
This chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurement
report analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyze
the live network.
6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis
Using the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand the
UMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements.
6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using the
U-Net.
4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,
or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment
for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
6 Setting NE You can import existing base station data to create base
parameters stations or use a base station template to automatically
create base stations. You can also create sites,
transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 6.7
Setting UMTS NE Parameters.
7 Calculating the path For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
loss
Context
l Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
l One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Save a project file.
Choose File > Save or click to save all the information about the project in a project
file.
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l Open an existing project file.
Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.
NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS and choose MIMO from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 6-3. The MIMO Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Modify the parameters of an existing MIMO type. Alternatively, click a blank line marked with
an asterisk (*) in the dialog box to set parameters for the new MIMO type.
----End
Context
The U-Net provides six default UMTS service types: UMTSVideo Conferencing,
UMTSVoice, UMTSHSDPA, UMTSHSUPA, UMTSMobile Internet Access, and
UMTSMultimedia Messaging Service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
If you need to... Then...
Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >
Services > UMTS.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-4.
3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table
6-3.
Modify an existing service 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >
type Services > UMTS > An existing service type.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by referring
to Table 6-3.
R99 Bearer Indicates the R99 bearer table assigned to a service type.
Parameter Meaning
FER(%) Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.
This parameter is available only for the CS services.
IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0
to 100.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS.
Create a receiver type. Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (marked
with *) in the dialog box. Select Bearer Selection Table.
Step 5 Double-click the heading of the receiver and set properties in the displayed dialog box. For
detailed description of parameters, see Table 6-4.
Parameter Meaning
IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges
from 0 to 100.
Parameter Meaning
Bearer Index Indicates the index of the HSDPA or HSUPA bearer table.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
type UMTS.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 6-5.
Modify an 1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS > Existing
existing terminal Terminal from the navigation tree.
type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table
6-5.
Parameter Meaning
Parameter Meaning
Active Set Size Indicates the threshold for the number of cells in an active
set. The value ranges from 1 to 6.
Rake Factor(DL) Indicates the efficiency factor of the Rake receiver on the
downlink. The value ranges from -32768 to 32768.
Number of Reception Antennas Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a
terminal.
----End
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,
see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA Bearer Table
window is displayed.
Parameter Description
Radio Bearer Index Indicates the index of the HSUPA bearer table. Its value is greater
than 0.
TTI Duration (ms) Indicates the duration of TTI scheduling. Its value is either 10 ms or
2 ms.
Number of E- Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The value ranges from
DPDCH codes 1 to 32767.
Min Spreading Indicates the minimum spreading factor. The value ranges from 2 to
Factor 32767.
Number of CEs Used Indicates the total CEs of the bearer service.
Transport Block Size Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer.
(bits)
RLC Peak Rate (bps) Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA Bearer Table
window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-7.
Transport Block Size Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer. The unit
(bits) is bit. The default value is 0.
Number of Used HS- Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The default value is 1.
PDSCH Channels
RLC Peak Rate (bps) Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer. The unit is bit/s. The default
value is 0.
Highest Modulation Indicates a modulation mode. Its value is QPSK, 16QAM, and
64QAM. The default value is QPSK.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose R99 Bearer from the shortcut menu. The UMTS R99 Bearer Table
window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-8.
Parameter Description
Nominal Rate(UL) Indicates the nominal rate of the uplink bearer service.
Nominal Rate(DL) Indicates the nominal rate of the downlink bearer service.
Min TCH Power Indicates the allowed lowest power of the downlink traffic channel.
(dBm) The unit is dBm.
Max TCH Power Indicates the allowed highest power of the downlink traffic channel.
(dBm) The unit is dBm.
CE Used Num(UL) Specifies the total CEs of the uplink bearer service.
CE Used Num(DL) Specifies the total CEs of the downlink bearer service.
Spreading Factor Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the uplink nominal
(UL) rate.
Spreading Factor Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the downlink nominal
(DL) rate.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading of the bearer table to open the UMTS Service Quality dialog
box. Then, set relevant parameters, and click OK.
NOTE
l Each bearer service in the R99 bearer table must be set. That is, each row in the table must be set.
l Mobility: set mobility.
l UL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the uplink traffic channel for the related mobility.
l DL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the downlink traffic channel for the related mobility.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA UE
Category Table window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-9.
Max Number of E-DPDCH Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.
Codes Its value is greater than or equal to 1.
Max Block Size for a 2ms TTI Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred during
(bits) TTI scheduling of 2 ms.
Its value is greater than or equal to 0.
Max Block Size for a 10ms TTI Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred during
(bits) TTI scheduling of 10 ms.
Its value is greater than or equal to 0.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA UE
Category Table window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-10.
Parameter Description
Max Number of HS-PDSCH Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.
Codes Its value is greater than or equal to 1.
Min Inter-TTI interval Indicates the minimum interval between the TTI
scheduling.
Its value is greater than or equal to 1.
Max Transport Block Size(bits) Indicates the maximum size of a transported block.
Its value is greater than or equal to 0.
----End
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l View base station templates.
2. The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
Such as .
l Create a base station template.
1. Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then,
a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
2. Set properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
3. Click OK.
l View and modify properties of the base station template.
1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
4. Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same
way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set the properties of UMTS cells on the UMTSCell tab page in the displayed dialog box, as
shown in Figure 6-6. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of UMTS Cells.
----End
Parameter Description
Use Altitude For Calculation Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for
calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the
altitude of a site for calculation.
Comments Description.
Comments Description.
Parameter Description
Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range is
from 0 to 1.
Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is from
0 to 1.
Max Load(DL) Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on the downlink. The
value range is from 0 to 1.
Max Load(UL) Indicates the maximum load of HSUPA on the uplink. The
value range is from 0 to 1.
SHO Reserve Ratio Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. The value range is
from 0 to 1.
Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total
uplink load.
Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the
total downlink load.
Max Noise Rise Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.
Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the UMTS Tab Page
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Max Noise Rise Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.
SHO Reserve Ratio Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. The
value range is from 0 to 1.
Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for soft
handoff to the total uplink load.
Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for soft
handoff to the total downlink load.
Parameter Description
Comments Remarks
Hexagon Radius(m) Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value
ranges from 1 to 100000.
l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the
radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius
(m) in the current site template by default.
l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in
the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty
by default.
Dx(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Azimuth Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit
is degree.
Parameter Description
Input Total Loss l If you select the check box, you need to manually type
the total loss.
l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total
loss.
TMA
Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click to
modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m) Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB) Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB) Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and
miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
NOTE
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the
corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut
menu.
Table 6-15 lists the UMTS prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Number Of Service Indicates the number of cells that can be added to the
active set.
Ec/Io CPICH Ec/Io Indicates the Ec/Io of the pilot signal received by a
UE.
HSDPA HS PDSCH Ec/Nt Indicates the Ec/Nt of the signals received on the HS-
Coverage PDSCH.
1 Traversing all the Determine whether the cells in the calculation area are
cells activated. If a cell is not activated, the counters of this
cell are not calculated.
2 Obtaining the path l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate the
loss matrix path loss matrix.
l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can be
obtained directly.
3 Querying the antenna You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain,
gain, equipment loss, equipment loss, and penetration loss during the
and penetration loss calculation of link loss.
4 Predicting slow To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with
fading by using the a certain probability. A certain amount of power of the
shadow fading base station is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The
margin reserved power is called shadow fading margin.
During the calculation of link loss, you can enable the
U-Net to take the shadow fading margin into account.
6 Calculating the You can calculate the power of interference and noise
power of interference and determine the handover area.
noise to determine
the handover area.
7 Calculating counters You must calculate the mandatory counters and custom
of traffic channels counters based on the BIN.
and common
channels based on the
Bin points
Factor Meaning
Loss caused by the Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to
human body the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Path loss Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Penetration loss Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles,
and leaves.
Total loss of the base Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
station feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l Propagation models are assigned to cells.
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l Calculation
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
Calculate forcibly Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path
Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
Step 5 Query the calculation results
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Context
l In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters:
DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH
SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL
RS SINR.
l In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,
PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
l In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for
the following predication counters:
Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
l In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set
for the following predication counters:
CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/
Nt.
l In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to
be set for the following predication counters:
Coverage By CIR.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display
dialog box is displayed.
The map information is Click Default Value to change the default values of parameters
not imported under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard
Deviation.
The map information is Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parameters
imported under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard
Deviation.
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
----End
Prerequisites
l A U-Net project is already created.
l The geographic data is imported.
l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5. Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6. Click OK.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-10.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction
Counters.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of
parameters, see 6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups.
Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Procedure
l View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction
Statistical Results (on a Map).
l View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing
Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.
Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.
Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
2. Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3. Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left.
NOTE
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors
on the map window.
l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4. Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5. View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.
----End
Example
This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.
The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna
downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the
two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.
Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the
recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.
To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure
l To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from
the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
l To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut
menu.
l To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut
menu.
Context
The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems
from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Procedure
l Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area.
You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points
in this area.
If... Then...
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
prediction results of a
prediction group
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx
prediction results of a > counter item.
single counter in a
prediction group
You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a
Bin point within the range.
If... Then...
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
prediction results of a
single counter in a
prediction group
Export the detailed In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx
prediction results of a > CPICH RSCP.
single counter in a
prediction group
NOTE
You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.
3. Choose Export BIN By > CPICH RSCP from the shortcut menu.
When you do not select the CPICH RSRP indicator when performing prediction
calculation, you cannot export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power.
The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage
area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the
cumulative percentage of the coverage area.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator.
The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified
range.
5. Click Export.
l Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable
only to single-mode networks.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > CPICH RSCP.
3. Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu. The dialog box
as shown in Figure 6-11 is displayed.
4. Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N
records to be exported.
5. Click Export.
6. After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data.
NOTE
l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include CPICH RSCP
when you creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-12.
l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of
TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-13. This value
specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents.
The exported contents mainly include:
l X-coordinate and Y-coordinate: If no geographic data is imported, the geodetic coordinates
are exported.
l Indicator values: It refers to the values of the selected indicators.
Context
The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the U-
Net is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.
Prerequisites
l The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or
created.
l The coverage prediction for CPICH RSCP is complete.
l The DT data file has been imported.
Context
The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For
detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.
Context
For detailed operations of exporting the feature database, see Export the top N records of the
reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result by
Bin Point.
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
l Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
l The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationship
template. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighbor
relationships.
Context
l Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
l Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
l Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network
technology.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
----End
Prerequisites
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
Context
On a new network, neighboring cell relationships do not exist. All neighboring cells are planned
initially. The initial planning of neighboring cells includes intra-frequency neighboring cell
planning, inter-frequency neighboring cell planning, and inter-RAT neighboring cell planning.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-14.
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters for
Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window. For details, see 6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning
Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
3. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 6.13.3
Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5. Click OK.
After the neighboring cell planning is complete, You can check and optimize neighboring cell
configuration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell
Configuration.
Prerequisites
Base station information has been created or imported, including network information before
the expansion and added site information after the expansion.
Procedure
Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the network before the expansion.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
3. Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
4. Select the Update Blind Handover Flag check box as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when
neighboring cell relationships are being imported.
5. Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file.
NOTE
l Select and import neighboring cell relationship files containing neighboring cell relationships
that are in the Added and No Change status.
l The values of CellName and NeighborCellName need to be the same as the names of cells and
neighboring cells on NEs respectively. The names of intra-RAT cells on NEs must be unique.
6. Click OK.
4. Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters
for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
5. Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6
Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.
----End
Prerequisites
l A GSM/UMTS network has been created.
l Base station information has been imported or created and the Cell Table files of 2G
network and 3G network have been imported respectively.
Context
The coverage area of 3G network is the same as that of the 2G network and the addresses of
sites on the 3G network are the same as those on the 2G network. Therefore, neighboring cells
on the 2G network are inherited on the 3G network. For the expansion of a 3G network, see
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.
Procedure
Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the 2G network.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
3. Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
4. Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file.
5. Click OK.
Step 2 Set planning parameters.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
3. Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-16.
4. Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters
for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
5. Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6
Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.
----End
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
NOTE
You need to select RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the
map window, as shown in Figure 6-17.
View neighboring cell relationships In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell
in the Cell area. Alternatively, click a certain
cell in the map window, as shown in Figure
6-18.
The neighboring cell relationships of the
selected cell are displayed in the table in the
Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
Apply the result of neighboring cell planning In the Cell area of the main window, Choose
to each cell Commit All from the shortcut menu..
After the result of neighboring cell planning
is applied, all the original neighboring cell
relationships are updated.
Export the result of neighboring cell planning 1. In the Cell area of the main window,
Choose Export from the shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog
box, select an export mode.
l Incremental Export: Export only the
changed neighboring cell
relationships.
l Full Export: Export all neighboring
cell relationships.
3. Click Export.
Delete neighboring cell relationships 1. In the Cell area of the main window, select
a cell whose neighboring cell
relationships need to be adjusted.
2. Clear the check boxes in the Confirm
column for the selected cells in the table
in the right pane.
Filter neighboring cell relationships 1. In the Cell area of the main window,
Choose Filter from the shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog
box. For details, see 6.13.4 Parameters
for Setting the Audit and Filter
Conditions Based on Neighboring
Relations.
3. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed
in green in the map window, as shown in
Figure 6-19.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog
box, the color of filtered cells in the map window
is cleared.
Remove the filter effect on neighboring cells Right-click in the Cell area of the main
window and choose Remove Filter from the
shortcut menu. The table in the right pane
switches back to the state when no filter
criterion is used, and the color of filtered cells
in the map window is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria
are used.
Audit neighboring cell relationships 1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-
click the table and choose Statistic from
the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed
dialog box. For details, see Parameters
for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering
Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The neighboring cell
relationship check report is exported to an
XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets,
and each sheet shows the result that meets
certain audit conditions.
Check missing neighboring cell relationships 1. In the Cell area of the main window,
Choose Export from the shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog
box, select Incremental Export.
l Incremental Export: Export only the
changed neighboring cell
relationships.
3. Click Export.
Check the status of exported neighboring cell
relationships. The neighboring cell
relationships in the Added state are missing
neighboring cell relationships.
Clear the neighboring cell planning result 1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main
window and choose Clear Existed
Neighbors from the shortcut menu, as
shown in Figure 6-20.
2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click
Y. The existing neighboring cell
relationships are cleared.
NOTE
You can clear the existing result of neighboring
cell planning so that the planning of neighboring
cells next time will not be affected.
NOTE
You can create neighboring cell planning scripts based on the result of neighboring cell planning. The U-
Net is applicable to the planning of intra-frequency and inter-frequency neighboring cells under different
RNCs. If inter-RNC neighboring cells are involved in the planning, type the RNC ID of each cell in the
RNCID column in the table in the Cell area.
----End
The planning and optimization of UMTS scrambling codes are applicable to the following
scenarios. Figure 6-22 shows the operation procedure.
l 6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network
l 6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration
Figure 6-22 Operation procedure for scenario-based scrambling code planning and optimization
Context
On the UMTS network, the U-Net supports the allocation of scrambling codes based on tier
reuse, distance reuse, and maximum-usage or average allocation principles. The U-Net also
provides multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping, vertical grouping, and
customized grouping. Users can use the U-Net to allocate scrambling code groups based on cell
types.
NOTE
l Scrambling code planning based on tier reuse is available after neighboring cell planning is complete.
l Maximum-usage allocation maximizes the reuse of scrambling code resources to increase the usage of
scrambling codes.
l Average allocation ensures that all scrambling codes are equally used.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Check the allocation of scrambling codes in the existing cells.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning.
3. Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is
displayed.View the scrambling codes of existing cells.
Step 3 Choose Set Scrambling Code Resource from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-23.
Step 4 Set scrambling code resource in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6 Parameters
for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes.
The U-Net automatically selects the cells that meet the height requirement from the Normal
cells and High_Site cells. The Scene of selected cells is set to High_Site, and the Scene of the
other cells is set to Normal. Cells in the two scenarios are displayed in the Cell area.
Step 11 Choose Scanning from the shortcut menu to check the usage of any scrambling code in cells of
the entire network.
Step 12 In the displayed dialog box, set the value of Scrambing Code from the drop-down list box. The
value range is from 0 to 511.
Step 15 Set parameters in the displayed Scrambling Code Plan dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6
Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window.. For details, see 6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS
Scrambling Codes .
NOTE
You can right-click UMTS Scrambling Code Planning and choose Stop Scrambling Codes Planning
from the shortcut menu to stop the current scrambling code planning.
----End
Prerequisites
UMTS scrambling codes have been planned.
Context
The scrambling code plan changes frequently on the live network due to causes such as network
expansion. Therefore, the distribution of the current scrambling codes needs to be checked
periodically to ensure that scrambling codes are properly distributed. The scrambling code
planning is a process of checking whether scrambling codes are reused based on preset reuse
tier and distance. The requirements of reuse tier and distance vary based on scenarios. Suburbs
and rural areas require more reuse tiers and longer reuse distance.
Procedure
Step 1 If the Scrambling Code Display window has been opened, go to Step 5. Otherwise, proceed
to Step 2.
Step 4 Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Perform the following operations as required.
If you need to... Then...
Enable the cells using the same scrambling 1. In the navigation tree, select UMTS
code as that of the selected cell in the planning Scrambling Code Planning.
result table to be displayed on the map 2. Choose Display Option from the shortcut
menu.
3. In the displayed Scrambling Code
Display Option dialog box, set the mode
and color for geographic display of
scrambling codes.
l Co Scrambling Code Cell: sets the
color for the cells that use the same
scrambling code with that of the
selected cell.
l Selected Cell Color: sets a color for
the selected cell.
l Link: identifies the scrambling code
planning results by lines.
l Cell: sets the color of the line
corresponding to the scrambling code
planning results.
4. Click OK.
5. Select a cell on the map or click a row
heading in the planning result table.
The cells that use the same scrambling
code as that of the selected cell are
displayed on the map at the same time.
Manually adjust scrambling codes In the result window, change the values of
Confirm Code.
Apply the planning results Right-click in the result window and choose
Commit from the shortcut menu to submit
the values of Confirm Code for all cells to
NEs.
Export the planning file of scrambling codes Right-click in the result window and choose
Export from the shortcut menu to export the
scrambling code planning results as a file. For
details about the parameters, see Parameters
in the Data Export Dialog Box.
Export MML script planning file for the Export the scrambling code planning result
scrambling codes data for generating the MML script file.
Collect statistics about the usage of 1. Right-click in the result window and
scrambling codes choose Graphic Result from the shortcut
menu.
2. In the Graphic Result window, set
parameters. For details about the
parameters, see Table 6-18.
graphic and data areas display the statistical
results.
You can double-click a column heading in the
table in the data area to sort the results.
Filter scrambling code planning results 1. Right-click in the result window and
choose Filter from the shortcut menu.
2. Specify a cell range from the Filter
Target drop-down list in the displayed
dialog box. All indicates all the cells on
the entire network, and Planning
indicates the cells in the planning area.
3. Select filter parameters. For details about
the parameters, see 6.13.8 Parameters
for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling
Code Planning Results.
4. Set ARFCN, which indicates the
downlink ARFCN.
NOTE
If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need to
set it.
5. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed
green on the map.
NOTE
If you set the filtering criterion to None in the
Filter dialog box, the color of the filtered cells on
the map is cleared.
Remove the filter effect Right-click in the result window and choose
Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The
Scrambling Code Display window switches
back to the status when no filter criterion was
used in Filter, and the color of cells is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria
are set in Filter.
Check the scrambling code planning results 1. Right-click in the result window and
choose Audit from the shortcut menu.
2. Specify a cell range from the Audit
Target drop-down list in the displayed
dialog box. All indicates all the cells on
the entire network, and Planning
indicates the cells in the planning area.
3. Select one or more statistical parameters.
For details about the parameters, see
6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and
Auditing Scrambling Code Planning
Results.
4. Set ARFCN, which indicates the
downlink ARFCN.
NOTE
If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need to
set it.
Clear the scrambling code planning results 1. Right-click in the result window and
choose Clear Existed Scrambling Code
from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 6-24.
2. In the displayed confirmation dialog box,
click Yes (Y). The existing scrambling
code planning results on NEs are cleared.
NOTE
After the planned scrambling codes are cleared, the
new scrambling code planning will not be affected.
Parameter Description
----End
Prerequisites
l You have imported geographic data.
l NodeBs are available.
l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 3 Right-click UMTS Measure Report and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 6-25.
Step 4 In the displayed UMTS Measure Report dialog box, select a computation area and set the data
source for measurement report analysis. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.10
Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate
the measurement report analysis group.
l Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop
calculating the measurement report analysis group.
Prerequisites
l You have created a measurement report analysis group.
l You have calculated the measurement report analysis group.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report > existing measurement report analysis
group.
Step 3 Right-click existing measurement report analysis group and choose New from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 6-26.
Step 4 In the displayed Measure Report Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as
shown in Figure 6-27. For details about these counters, see 6.13.11 Parameters for
Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, click OK or Apply to create measurement report analysis counters.
NOTE
After measurement report analysis counters are created, the live network data analysis results of the counters
are geographically displayed in the map window.
----End
NOTE
The U-Net supports only UMTS network capacity expansion by splitting sectors.
Figure 6-28 shows the flow chart for analyzing network capacity expansion through the U-Net.
Prerequisites
l The geographic data has been imported.
l NodeBs are available.
l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 Choose UMTS Network Expansion from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click UMTS Network Expansion and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 6-29.
Step 4 In the displayed Network Expansion Analysis dialog box, select a computation area, set a data
source and policy for expansion analysis, and set algorithm parameters for soft handovers and
MR-based traffic evaluation. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.12 Parameters for
Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate
the capacity expansion analysis group.
l Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop
calculating the capacity expansion analysis group.
NOTE
l
l The time required for the calculation depends on the selected MR data size, computation area, and the
selected expansion policy. The required calculation time is directly proportional to the MR data size,
computation area, and expansion policy complexity.
Prerequisites
l You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.
l You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis
group.
Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose New from the shortcut menu, as
shown in Figure 6-30.
Step 4 In the displayed Expansion Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as shown
in Figure 6-31. For details about these counters, see 6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically
Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.
NOTE
You can check Initial, Final, and Variation analysis results for each counter.
After the analysis items are created, the expansion analysis results of the counters are geographically
displayed in the map window.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.
l You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis
group.
Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose Result from the shortcut menu, as
shown in Figure 6-32.
Step 4 In the displayed Result dialog box, check the network capacity expansion results. For details
about these parameters, see 6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion
Results.
----End
Cell Edge Coverage Probability Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, that is,
the probability that the receive signal strength is
stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a
cell.
Parameter Description
Planning Neighbor based on Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring
existed Neighbors relationships.
If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring
relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are
replanned.
Reference Site Distance(m) Sets the distance difference between the cell to be planned
and the referenced cell.
Consider Handover Statistics Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path
for saving the handover data.
Planning Weight Indicates the weight of the planning result upon neighboring
cell ranking.
Handover Statistics Weight Indicates the weight of the handover data upon neighboring
cell ranking.
Parameter Description
Cell Edge Coverage Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This
Probability(%) parameter is valid only when shadow fading is considered
in the calculation. The value of the parameter is directly
proportional to the value of shadow fading.
This parameter is valid only when the network planning
scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Parameter Description
Table 6-25 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring
cell planning)
Parameter Description
SourceNetType Indicates the network system that the source cell belongs to.
Fit Neighbor Cell Visible Displays the neighboring relationships of a cell on the
map after you select the cell in the neighboring
relationship table.
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can
view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
6.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based
on Neighboring Relations
This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor
relationships and filtering neighboring cells.
Table 6-28 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells
Parameter Description
Missing Co-Site Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.
List > No: Filters the neighboring cells whose neighboring cells are
more than the specified value.
Percentage of Reference Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share the
Neighbors neighboring relationships with the GSM cells at the same
site as the UMTS cells.
Same PCI Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This
parameter is available only for the LTE network.
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific
network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Cause Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell
of the serving cell.
l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the
network.
l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships.
l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added
by users.
l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships.
Vertical(64 codes per group) Indicates that vertical grouping is used. Each
group consists of 64 scrambling codes and there
are a total of 8 groups.
Horizontal(8 codes per group) Indicates that horizontal grouping is used. Each
group consists of 8 scrambling codes and there are
a total of 64 groups.
512 Codes(512 codes per group) Indicates that all the 512 scrambling codes are in
one group.
Reserved The Last [] Groups Reserves the last N scrambling code groups.
Reserved The Last [] Codes Per Group Reserves the last N scrambling codes of each
group.
Select Usable Group Indicates the scrambling code groups used by the
same type of cell.
Scrambling Code Reuse Tier Indicates the number of layers for scrambling
code reuse for the same type of cell.
Scrambling Code Reuse Distance Indicates the scrambling code reuse distance for
the same type of cells.
Group Different From Neighbor Site Sets whether different scrambling code groups are
allocated to neighboring base stations.
If this option is selected, different scrambling
code groups are allocated to neighboring base
stations. This parameter is selected by default.
Allocate Different Scrambling Code for If this option is selected, different scrambling
Cells in the Same Transceiver codes are allocated to inter-frequency cells
sharing sectors.
Distance Decending Percentage(%) Sets the percentage of the step for reducing the
scrambling code reuse distance.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Suggest Code Indicates the scrambling codes that are recommended for
setting.
Min Reuse Tier Indicates that the statistical information is collected by the
number of layers a scrambling code is reused.
Table 6-34 Parameters for filtering or auditing scrambling code planning results
Parameter Description
Allocation Failed Cells Indicates the cells for which scrambling code allocation
fails.
No Allocation Cells Indicates the cells that are not allocated with scrambling
codes.
Reuse Tier <= Indicates the cells for which the number of scrambling
code reuse layers is less than the specified value. A
UARFCN must be specified.
Reuse Distance(km) <= Indicates the cells for which the scrambling code reuse
distance is less than the specified value. A UARFCN must
be specified.
Using Reserved Code Indicates the cells that use reserved scrambling codes. A
UARFCN must be specified.
Using Forbidden Code Indicates the cells that use forbidden scrambling codes.
Using Non-continuous Code Indicates the co-site and intra-frequency cells that do not
use consecutive scrambling codes in the same scrambling
code group. A UARFCN must be specified.
Using Same Group with Indicates the cells that use the same scrambling code group
Neighbor Site as the adjacent sites. A UARFCN must be specified.
through .
l The computation area size
affects the MR analysis
efficiency. To obtain analysis
results quickly, you need to
draw a proper computation
area.
1st.Data Row Row in an MR file from This parameter is set based on site
which data is imported. requirements.
Cell Average RSCP Average RSCP of all MRs for This parameter is mandatory.
a cell with a specific
longitude and latitude.
Cell Average EcIo Average EcIo value of all This parameter is mandatory.
MRs for a cell with a specific
longitude and latitude.
Single Cell EcIo analysis Geographically displays the EcIo value for a
single cell of each grid.
Single Cell User count analysis Geographically displays the number of users
of a single cell of each grid.
.
l The computation area size affects
the capacity expansion analysis
efficiency. To obtain analysis
results quickly, you need to draw
a proper computation area.
Min RSCP Threshold Minimum RSCP This parameter is used for calculating
(dBm) threshold. cells of the UE's active set for each
The default value is -110 grid.
dBm. Other cells can be added to the UE's
active set only when the RSCPs of
the cells in the current position
exceed this threshold.
ActiveSet Size Size of a UE's active set. All the cells that meet conditions of
Min RSCP Threshold and RSCP
Margin can be added to the active
set. If the number of cells that meet
the conditions exceed the value of
ActiveSet Size, the exceeded
number of cells cannot be added to
the active set and these cells are
considered as pilot pollution cells.
Measure Report Period for reporting MRs. This parameter is used for calculating
Duration(s) The default value is 12 traffic based on the number of MRs.
seconds. You can configure this parameter
based on site requirements.
Cell Average RSCP Average RSCP of all MRs for This parameter is mandatory.
a cell with a specific
longitude and latitude.
Cell Average EcIo Average EcIo value of all This parameter is mandatory.
MRs for a cell with a specific
longitude and latitude.
EcIo Geographically displays the EcIo value for the primary serving
cell of each grid.
Best Server Geographically displays the primary serving cell of each grid.
Handover Area Geographically displays the soft handover status of each grid.
Soft handover grids are the grids for which the number of cells
that meet handover conditions does not exceed the active set
threshold.
Parameter Description
This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supports
only the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes.
After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the CDMA network.
You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for
each cell one by one.
7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning
The CDMA system adopts the spread spectrum communication technology to spread the
spectrum of signals on forward and reverse links through PN codes. Therefore, proper PN code
planning is of great importance for improving CDMA network quality.
7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for CDMA network planning by using the
U-Net.
4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,
or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment
for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
5 Setting NE You can import existing base station data to create base
parameters stations or use a base station template to automatically
create base stations. You can also create sites,
transmitters, or repeaters separately. For details, see 7.6
Setting CDMA NE Parameters.
6 Planning PN codes/ For details, see 7.8.2 Planning PN Codes and 6.9
Planning Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells.
neighboring cells The planning results can be applied to NEs.
Context
l Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
l One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-2.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Save a project file.
Choose File > Save or click to save all the information about the project in a project
file.
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l Open an existing project file.
Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.
NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l View base station templates.
1. Select Template Management from the base station template drop-down list on the
toolbar and open the Station Template Properties dialog box.
2. The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
For example, .
l Create a base station template.
1. Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then,
a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
2. Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameter for Setting
CDMA Base Station Templates.
3. Click OK.
l View and modify properties of the base station template.
1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see
Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates.
4. Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same
way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 On the CDMACell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the CDMA cell.
For parameter description, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA Cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Use Altitude For Calculation Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for
calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the
altitude of a site for calculation.
Comments Description.
Comments Description.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Comment Remarks.
Hexagon Radius(m) Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value
ranges from 1 to 100000.
l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the
radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius
(m) in the current site template by default.
l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in
the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty
by default.
Dx(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna
belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Azimuth Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit
is degree.
Parameter Description
Input Total Loss l If you select the check box, you need to manually type
the total loss.
l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total
loss.
TMA
Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click to
modify its properties.
Feeder
Antenna feeder. You can click to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m) Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB) Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB) Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and
miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
uplink and downlink.
Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,
reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments
to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
l Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
Context
l Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
l Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
l Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network
technology.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
----End
Prerequisites
l Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
l In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported
into the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells.
Step 5 Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing
Neighboring Cell Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA.
3. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4. In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3
Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5. Click OK.
l You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details,
see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
NOTE
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can
be displayed in the map window.
View neighboring cell In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.
relationships Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown
in Figure 7-3.
The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are
displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
Filter neighboring cells 1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the
shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see
Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor
Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The
filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as
shown in Figure 7-4.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered
cells in the map window is cleared.
Remove the filter effect Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose
on neighboring cells Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell area
switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the
color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
Audit neighboring cell 1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and
relationships choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet
shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Apply the result of In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from
neighboring cell planning the shortcut menu..
to each cell After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the
original neighboring cell relationships are updated.
Export the result of 1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the
neighboring cell planning shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export
mode.
l Incremental Export: Export only the changed
neighboring cell relationships.
l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships.
3. Click Export.
NOTE
In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the
values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE
network when creating MML scripts.
Delete neighboring cell 1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whose
relationships neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted.
2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm
column of the table in the right pane.
Export the X2 interface This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network.
relationship data The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after the
planning result is applied to each cell.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.
2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the
shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box is
displayed.
3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationship
data needs to be exported.
4. Specify an export path.
5. Click OK.
Clear the result of 1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose
neighboring cell planning Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing result
of neighboring cell planning is cleared.
NOTE
You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the
planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.
----End
Prerequisites
PN group data has been obtained from customer representatives.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Open PN Group from the shortcut menu. The PN Group dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Right-click in the dialog box, and choose Import from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Select a PN group file and import it to the U-Net.
Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 2.
Step 7 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.
Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, set planned PN code parameters. For details about the parameters,
see 7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes.
Step 9 Click Run.
After PN codes are planned, the PN Display dialog box is displayed. For details about the
parameters, see 7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Apply planning results to NEs.
Right-click in the PN Display dialog box, and choose Commit to apply the planning results.
The new PN codes overwrite the existing PN codes.
l Show PN code relationships for sectors on the GIS.
1. In the navigation tree, select the box in front of PN Planning.
2. On the map, select a sector or click the head of a row in the planning result table.
The system displays the sectors having the same PN code as the selected sector.
Prerequisites
PN code planning is complete.
Procedure
l Set criteria for checking PN code planning results.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.
3. Right-click and choose Open PN Table from the shortcut menu. The PN Display
dialog box is displayed.
4. In the dialog box, right-click and choose Audit from the shortcut menu. The Audit
Form dialog box is displayed.
5. Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-6. The U-Net allows you to select
multiple check criteria at a time.
Neighbour sectors Indicates that the same PN codes exist between neighboring
used the same PN cells.
code
Parameter Description
Base on Existed Indicates that the check is based on the data on the existing
Neighbor and PN network.
Base on Planned Indicates that the check is based on the planning results.
Neighbor and PN
5. Click OK to export a check report. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.8
Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results.
l Filter 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.
3. Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Open from the shortcut menu.
4. On the One way result or Two way result tab page of the displayed Check Result
dialog box, right-click and choose Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation from the
shortcut menu. The Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation dialog box is displayed.
5. Set the filter conditions by referring to Table 7-8.
Parameter Description
Distance threshold between source cell Indicates that the distance between the
and its neighbor cell(km) >=: source cell and its neighboring cell
exceeds the predefined value.
Angle threshold of its neighbor cell Indicates that the angle between the
relative to source cell >=: source cell and its neighboring cell
exceeds the predefined value.
Angle threshold of source cell relative to Indicates that the angle between the
its neighbor cell >=: neighboring cell and the source cell
exceeds the predefined value.
Layer threshold between source cell and Indicates that the number of layers
its neighbor cell >=: between the source cell and its
neighboring cell exceeds the predefined
value.
6. Click OK.
NOTE
In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, filtered 1way-2way redundant neighbor
relationships are displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, right-click an item and you can delete the
corresponding data item.
Prerequisites
PN code planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click PN Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcut
menu. See Figure 7-5.
Step 3 In the displayed Display Options dialog box, set the parameters for setting the display properties
of PN codes. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display
Properties of PN Codes.
----End
Parameter Description
Rhombus AngleA: Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number
of layers. The distance between base stations is less than 5
km.
Rhombus AngleB: Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number
of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than
5 km but less than 10 km.
Rhombus AngleC: Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number
of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than
10 km but less than 20 km.
Rhombus AngleD: Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number
of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than
20 km.
POI Indicates whether indoor and outdoor cells use the same PN
group.
TRUE: The same PN group is used. FALSE: Different PN
groups are used.
MaxDistance Indicates the maximum distance (km) between cells that the
same PN group is allocated to.
Parameter Description
MSC_BSC_BTS_Sector Indicates the combination of the MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
and sector ID.
Co-Sector Indicates a sector that shares the PN code with the source
sector.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Planning Neighbor based on Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring
existed Neighbors relationships.
If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring
relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are
replanned.
Base on Main Frequency Indicates that the non-main-ARFCN neighboring cells are
configured based on the configured main-ARFCN
neighboring cell relationships.
If this option is selected, the non-main-ARFCN neighboring
relationship can be configured only if the main-ARFCN
neighboring relationship has been configured.
Fit Neighbor Cell Visible Displays the neighboring relationships of a cell on the
map after you select the cell in the neighboring
relationship table.
Legend Description
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can
view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
7.9.6 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based
on Neighboring Relations
This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor
relationships and filtering neighboring cells.
Table 7-16 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells
Parameter Description
Missing Co-Site Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.
List > No: Filters the neighboring cells whose neighboring cells are
more than the specified value.
Percentage of Reference Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share the
Neighbors neighboring relationships with the GSM cells at the same
site as the UMTS cells.
Same PCI Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This
parameter is available only for the LTE network.
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific
network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.
Parameter Description
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Parameter Description
Cause Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell
of the serving cell.
l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the
network.
l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships.
l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added
by users.
l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships.
The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on the
hybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTS
network coverage range to meet your network planning requirements.
4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,
or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment
for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
6 Setting NE You can import existing base station data to create base
parameters stations or use a base station template to automatically
create base stations. You can also create sites,
transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 8.7
Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters.
7 Calculating the path For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
loss
Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM,
UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
Context
l Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
l One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-2.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Save a project file.
Choose File > Save or click to save all the information about the project in a project
file.
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
l Open an existing project file.
Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.
NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For
details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see
3.6.6 Setting User Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,
see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >
Services > RAT.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set new service type parameters.
l For GSM networks, see Parameters for Setting the
GSM Services.
l For UMTS networks, see Parameters for Setting the
UMTS Services.
l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for Setting the
LTE-FDD Services.
l UnionService: see Table 8-2.
Modify an existing service 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >
type Services > Network system > An existing service type.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify service type parameters.
AMR Rate(kbit/s) Indicates the rate of a voice service. The unit is kbit/s.
The values are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
Parameter Meaning
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
type RAT.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters of the new terminal type.
l For GSM networks, see Parameters for setting GSM terminal
types.
l For UMTS networks, seeParameters for setting UMTS terminal
types.
l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for setting LTE-FDD
terminal types.
l UnionTerminal: For example, if a multi-mode terminal supports
both GSM and UMTS, set GSM and UMTS in Select Terminal.
Modify an 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
existing terminal Network system > An existing terminal type.
type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify parameters of the existing terminal type.
----End
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l View base station templates.
2. The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
Such as .
l Create a base station template.
1. Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then,
a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
2. Set properties of the BTS template.
For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD base station template, see
Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.
For details about setting the properties of an GSM base station template, see
Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
For details about setting the properties of an UMTS base station template, see
Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
3. Click OK.
l View and modify properties of the base station template.
1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. Query and modify properties of the base station template.
For details about querying and modifying the properties of an LTE-FDD base
station template, see Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station
Templates.
For details about querying and modifying the properties of an GSM base station
template, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
For details about querying and modifying the properties of an UMTS base station
template, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
4. Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set properties of cells on the Network system tab page.
l For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD cell, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells.
l For details about setting the properties of a GSM cell, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of GSM Cells.
l For details about setting the properties of a UMTS cell, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of UMTS Cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by
learning the basic knowledge.
The formulas for calculating uplink loss and downlink loss are as follows:
l Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain
of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
l Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna
gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are
included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss
which is included into the total loss of the base station.
Factor Meaning
Loss caused by the Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to
human body the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Path loss Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Factor Meaning
Penetration loss Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles,
and leaves.
Total loss of the base Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
station feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
l Propagation models are assigned to cells.
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l Calculation
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
Calculate forcibly Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path
Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event
Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown
in Figure 8-5.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5. Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6. Click OK.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 8-6.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction
Counters and Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of
parameters, see 8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-
Mode Network.
Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Procedure
l View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction
Statistical Results (on a Map).
l View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing
Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.
Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.
Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
2. Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3. Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left.
NOTE
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors
on the map window.
l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4. Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5. View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.
----End
Example
This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.
The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna
downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. Click Antenna Config tab Page.
5. Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the
two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.
Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the
recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.
To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure
l To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from
the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
l To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut
menu.
l To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut
menu.
Context
The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems
from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Select the objects to be exported.
If you need to... Then...
Export the detailed prediction In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
results of a prediction group
Export the detailed prediction In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >
results of a single counter in a counter item.
prediction group
Step 3 Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.
The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points in the selected area.
Step 5 Click Export.
----End
Context
The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the U-
Net is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.
Parameter Meaning
Parameter Meaning
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
l The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
l Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
l The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationship
template. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighbor
relationships.
Context
l Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
l Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
l Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network
technology.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
----End
Context
l The U-Net supports cell planning in GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD dual-mode or multi-mode
networks.
l The U-Net performs automatic neighboring cell planning on a per RAT basis. For example,
in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, automatic neighboring cell planning must be
performed separately in the GSM network and the UMTS network.
l In a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, UMTS neighboring cell planning can be performed
in reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-sited GSM cell.
l On a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multi-mode network, LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning
can be performed in reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-site GSM or UMTS
cell.
l This section describes the neighboring cell planning on a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multi-
mode network.
Procedure
Step 1 For neighboring cell planning of a GSM network, see 5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring
Cells.
Step 2 For neighboring cell planning of a UMTS network, see 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning
for a New Network.
Step 3 For neighboring cell planning of an LTE-FDD network, see Planning LTE-FDD Neighboring
Cells.
----End
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
NOTE
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can
be displayed in the map window.
View neighboring cell In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.
relationships Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown
in Figure 8-7.
The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are
displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
Filter neighboring cells 1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the
shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see
Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor
Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The
filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as
shown in Figure 8-8.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered
cells in the map window is cleared.
Remove the filter effect Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose
on neighboring cells Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell area
switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the
color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
Audit neighboring cell 1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and
relationships choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet
shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Apply the result of In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from
neighboring cell planning the shortcut menu..
to each cell After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the
original neighboring cell relationships are updated.
Export the result of 1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the
neighboring cell planning shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export
mode.
l Incremental Export: Export only the changed
neighboring cell relationships.
l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships.
3. Click Export.
NOTE
In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the
values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE
network when creating MML scripts.
Delete neighboring cell 1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whose
relationships neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted.
2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm
column of the table in the right pane.
Export the X2 interface This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network.
relationship data The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after the
planning result is applied to each cell.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.
2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the
shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box is
displayed.
3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationship
data needs to be exported.
4. Specify an export path.
5. Click OK.
Clear the result of 1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose
neighboring cell planning Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing result
of neighboring cell planning is cleared.
NOTE
You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the
planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.
----End
Parameter Description
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Cause Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell
of the serving cell.
l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the
network.
l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships.
l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added
by users.
l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships.
9 FAQ
This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net.
9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net
This section describes how to select the required software before installing the U-Net to ensure
that the U-Net runs properly. Refer to the following information before you install the U-Net.
9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support
Website
This section describes how to select the proper GENEX U-Net software installation packages
at huawei support website. Four GENEX U-Net software installation packages are available at
huawei support website. You need to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages
based on the configurations of PCs. Refer to the following information before you download
installation packages from huawei support website.
9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area
In the Field Mapping area, you can check whether the fields in the file to be imported match
those in the U-Net system. When you import a file to the U-Net and the system already displays
the Data Import or Import File dialog box, you can refer to the information provided in this
section.
9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft
Office 2007
This section describes how to use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file
in Microsoft Office 2007. Refer to the following information if you cannot use the U-Net to
import data into or export data from an XLS file after the Microsoft Office 2007 has been
installed.
9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of
the Map Contains Chinese Characters
This section describes how to import a map in an English Windows 7 operating system when
the directory of the map contains Chinese characters. Refer to the following information when
the directory of an imported map contains Chinese characters in an English Windows 7 operating
system.
9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly
This section describes how to solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is
used, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, and other abnormal display. Refer
to the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthView
function.
9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project
to Display Properly
This section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creating
a project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creating
a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after
the printer is disconnected from the network.
9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System
This section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when
the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to the
following information if the preceding problem occurs.
9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure
This section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damaged
or missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You can
refer to this section when a project fails to be created.
Question
How do I select the required software before installing the U-Net?
Answer
The software to be installed in advance varies according to the U-Net version. Select the software
to be installed based on the U-Net version.
If... Then...
The Volcano propagation model is required Contact Siradel to purchase Volcano 3.1.2 or
a later version.
----End
Question
How to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages at Huawei support website?
Answer
Step 1 View the four GENEX U-Net software installation packages at http://support.huawei.com, as
shown in Figure 9-1.
l Huawei.UNet32(exclude framework)
Supports 32-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework.
l Huawei.UNet64
Supports 64-bit operating system, including the .net framework.
l Huawei.UNet64(exclude framework)
Supports 64-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework.
l Huawei.UNet32
Supports 32-bit operating system, including the .net framework.
NOTE
Step 2 Check whether the .net framework is installed in Add/Remove Programs and select installation
packages based on the actual situation.
If... Then...
The .net framework has Download the installation package excluding the .net framework.
been installed.
The .net framework is Download the installation package including the .net framework.
not installed.
----End
Question
How to check field matching in the Field Mapping area?
Answer
Step 1 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Source row, as shown in
Figure 9-2.
l The Source row displays the column fields of the file to be imported.
l If the Source row cannot display field names correctly, you need to modify the file to be
imported.
l The U-Net has requirements on the format of the file to be imported. Therefore, it is
recommended that you export the existing data in the system to a file, which is used as a
template. After that, you modify data based on the template and then import the file to the
U-Net.
Step 2 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Destination row.
If... Then...
Display IGNORE. l It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported do not match
those in the system. Therefore, the data of this column cannot
be imported to the U-Net.
l If the fields in the file to be imported match some existing fields
in the system. You can click next to the cell to manually
match them.
NOTE
l Among the fields in the system, there are one or more fields that must
be matched. These fields must match those in the file to be imported.
Otherwise, you cannot click Import or the system prompts an error
message when you click Import.
l For example, when you import a site file, Site Name is a field that must
be matched.
Display existing field It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported match those in
names in the system. the system. Therefore, the data of this column can be imported to
the U-Net.
----End
Question
When data is being imported into or exported from an XLS file, a dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 9-3. How can I solve the problem? The following takes exporting neighboring
cell relationships for example.
Answer
Set regional language of the operating system to be the same as the language of the current
version of Microsoft Office 2007 by referring to workaround measures provided by the
Microsoft.
If the language of the current version of Microsoft Office 2007 is English, set regional language
of the operating system to English (United States) on the Regional Options tab page, as shown
in Figure 9-4.
----End
Question
How to solve the problem if a map fails to be imported and displayed in an English Windows 7
operating system because the directory of the map contains Chinese characters?
Answer
Step 1 Choose Control Panel > Region and Language > Administrative, as shown in Figure 9-5.
----End
Question
How do I solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure to
load the Google Earth, garbled images, abnormal display during remote connection attempts,
and other abnormal display events?
Answer
Step 1 Ensure that the Google Earth client in 6.0.3.2197 or later is installed.
Step 2 You are advised to select DirectX in the Graphics Mode area, as shown in Figure 9-7.
----End
Question
The progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new
project runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network. How can I solve the
problem?
Answer
If you set a remote printer as a default printer, the access to a local printer takes a long period
of time or fails. In this case, the system runs slowly or the progress bar for creating a project
remains unchanged when you obtain printer parameters to create a project.
Set a local printer that is accessible as the default printer or delete all printers.
----End
Question
How to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used to
draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system?
Answer
The MSVCR71.DLL system library file needs to be invoked when you are using the U-Net to
draw a graph. This system library file is delivered with all Windows operating systems by default
except the Windows XP 64-bit operating system.
In a Windows XP 32-bit operating system, search the MSVCR71.DLL system library file in
the System32 directory. Then copy the file to the SysWOW64 directory in the Windows XP
64-bit operating system.
----End
Question
How do I solve the problem when a project fails to be created and the dialog box in Figure
9-8 is displayed?
Answer
Step 1 Choose Start > Run. The Run dialog box is displayed.
----End
The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zooming
in or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display.
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.
Procedure
l Zoom in on or zoom out on a map.
You can zoom in on and zoom out on a map by changing the position of the mouse pointer.
l You can scroll the mouse wheel forward or backward to zoom in on or zoom out on the
map.
l Alternatively, you can right-click in the map window and choose Zoom In or Zoom Out
to zoom in on or zoom out on the map.
l Magnify an area on a map.
1. Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose
Define a Zoom Area from the shortcut menu.
2. Click a corner of the area to be magnified on the map.
3. Hold and drag the mouse pointer to the diagonal corner of the area.
If the required scaling is not available in the list, you can click
, type the required scaling in the box, and press Enter. The U-
Net zooms in on or zooms out on the map based on the specified scaling.
l Move a map.
To enable the map to center on an object in the map window, right-click an object in
the Explorer window and choose Center in The Map from the shortcut menu.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Distance
Measurement from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click a point on the map and use it as the starting point for measuring the distance.
Then, the starting point is fixed. When the pointer moves away from the starting point, a red
dotted line appears between the pointer and the starting point. The distance between the pointer
and the starting point is displayed in the status bar in real time.
Step 3 Click another point on the map and use it as the second point for measuring the distance.
Then, the red dotted line between the starting point and the second line becomes a red continuous
line.
Distance: Distance between the second-to-last point and the last point/Distance between the first
point and the last point
Step 5 Double-click the line or right-click in the map window to complete the distance measurement.
----End
Procedure
Step 2 Click in the map window to determine the start point of the terrain analysis line.
After determining the start point, move the cursor. A dotted line appears between the cursor and
the start point.
Step 3 Click in another place in the map window to determine the end point of the terrain analysis line.
After the end point is determined, a continuous line appears between the two points.
The terrain profile of the two points is displayed in the Terrain View window.
NOTE
l The system allows you to draw only one terrain analysis line.
l After a terrain analysis line is drawn, click in any place in the map window. The original terrain analysis
line disappears and the system begins to draw a new terrain analysis line.
Step 4 As shown in Figure 10-1, set the following parameters in the Terrain View window:
l Transceiver height: Indicates the height of a transmitter.
l Receiver height: Indicates the height of a receiver.
l Show building: Indicates whether to show the buildings.
l Frequency: Indicates the frequency of a transmitter.
After the parameters are set, the Terrain View window will automatically update and display
the terrain profile.
----End
Context
You can select legend objects for display based on the service analysis requirement. For example,
during the prediction, the map displays multiple prediction results and you may find it difficult
to query the required prediction result. In this case, you can select or clear a legend object to
display or hide certain prediction results. Therefore, you can focus on the key services. Then,
only the selected legend object is displayed in the legend window.
This section describes how to query the legend information about the prediction results. The
procedure for querying other legend information is similar to the procedure for querying the
legend information about the prediction results.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a legend object.
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. Click the Display tab.
5. In the last column of the object list, select legend objects as required.
NOTE
The non-selected object will not be displayed in the legend window.
If the default legend objects cannot meet your analysis requirements, you can define new
objects. For example, to add a new legend object before an existing legend object, you can
select the existing legend object and choose Actions > Insert Before; then, the system
creates the new legend object automatically.
6. Select Add to legend. The legend of prediction is displayed in the Legend window.
7. Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the
Legend window.
You can set the color, description, and value range of a legend in the object list.
After the prediction calculation is complete, the description information and color of all the
selected legend objects in the project are displayed in the legend window.
----End
Prerequisites
l A coordinate system is available.
l The PC is connected to the Internet.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar. The Earth View dialog box is displayed.
You must set a coordinate system. For detailed description of parameters, see 3.3.7 Configuring
the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.
Step 2 Select the object to be displayed on the Google Earth. For detailed description of parameters,
see 10.17.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth.
Step 3 Click View to connect the U-Net to the Google Earth.
Step 4 Optional: Click Save to save the selected U-Net data to a .kmz file.
By default, the .kmz file is saved on the desktop of the PC and the file name is
UNet_Generated.kmz. You can also click to reset the path to save the file and the file name.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can query objects displayed in three-
dimensional mode on the Google Earth. See Figure 10-2.
l After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can select or clear the objects
described in Step 2 in the navigation tree in the Explorer window of the U-Net. In this way,
the objects can be displayed or hidden on the Google Earth.
l After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can modify the objects described in
Step 2, such as creating or deleting a prediction group or a polygon. Upon completion of
the modification, perform Step 1 to Step 4 again to refresh the display status of the Google
Earth.
select a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer is
accurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers so
that you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers.
Prerequisites
The geographic data is imported.
Context
A map consists of a series of layers. The top layer can be clearly viewed in the map. It can also
be clearly viewed after the map is printed. The visibility of the bottom layer depends on the
definition and transparency of the upper layers.
On the U-Net, the display sequence of the layers is determined by the sequence of the nodes
under the Map node on the Geo tab page in the Explorer window. You can adjust the sequence
of each node under the Map node to adjust the display sequence of each layer.
You can use the U-Net to adjust the display sequence of the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text,
Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights and the display sequence of the sublayers of these
layers. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of the prediction counters in the map
window.
Procedure
l Select the layer objects to be displayed.
In the Explorer window, you can select or clear the check box of a layer object to display
or hide the layer object. For example, if you select the check box of Map on the Geo tab
page, all the layers corresponding to the nodes under the Map node are displayed in the
map window. If you clear the check box of a node under the Map node, the layer
corresponding to the node is hidden in the map window.
NOTE
The hidden object in the map window is still taken into account during calculation.
l Adjust the position of a layer.
During network planning, the U-Net supports the offset of the layers Satellitic,
Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights. This enables users to adjust
the map and positions of the sites.
1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Map.
3. Choose Adjust Map from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Map dialog box is
displayed.. See Figure 10-3.
4. Select the layer to be adjusted from the Map Layer drop-down list.
If only one layer is selected after the layer is selected, its geodetic coordinates at the
northern boundary are displayed in the Top of Layer field and its geodetic coordinates
at the western boundary is displayed in the Left of Layer field. The vertical offset of
the layer is displayed in the Y Offset text box and the horizontal offset of the layer is
displayed in the X Offset text box. If two or more layers are selected or no layer is
selected, no value is displayed for Top of Layer, Left of Layer, Y Offset, and X
Offset.
NOTE
For the offset of the layers Geometry, Text, and Vector, The values of Top of Layer and Left
of Layer are not displayed. For the offset of the layers Satellitic, Buildings, Clutter, and
Heights, The values of Top of Layer and Left of Layer indicate the geodetic coordinates of
corresponding layers.
5. Type the layer offset in the text box in the middle and set the offset direction by clicking
Up, Down, Left, or Right.
The offset of a layer ranges from 10 meters to 10,000 meters.
6. Click Close. The layer position adjustment is complete.
The positions of layers are refreshed in the map window accordingly.
l Adjust the display sequence of layers.
1. On the Geo tab page of the Explorer window, select the nodes corresponding to the
target layer objects under the Map node.
The layer objects include the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings,
Clutter, and Heights.
2. Click a layer object and drag it to the new position.
The horizontal black line indicates the position where the object is to be placed when
you release the mouse. After you drag the object, the U-Net automatically refreshes
the display effect of the map based on the adjusted sequence.
----End
Prerequisites
The geographic data is imported.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the objects to be exported.
Export 1. Under the Geo tab in the Explorer window, select the layers to be
overlapped layers exported under the Map node.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Map.
Step 2 Choose Save As from the shortcut menu. The Export Map Layer dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Set the save path, file name, and file format of the exported file.
TIP
The higher the resolution is, the larger the map size is. Before exporting a map, ensure that the save path
has sufficient free disk space.
----End
Procedure
l Table 10-1 lists the common operations provided in a table window.
Switch a table window. Click the tab title. Alternatively, you can click on the
right and then select the required table window from the
drop-down list.
Drag a column in a table Click the column name to select it. Then, click the column
window. name again, hold the left mouse button, and drag the
column to the required position when the mouse arrow
changes to .
Not all the table windows support this function.
If a shortcut menu item in a table window grays out, it indicates that the function is not supported in the
table window or the function is currently unavailable.
Export Exports the data of all the available columns in a table. The file
exported is in the .txt, .csv, or .xls format.
Name Description
Record Properties Displays the property panel of the NE corresponding to the selected
cell.
Table Fields Opens the window for customizing table fields. The window is used
for setting customized fields and supports the Site, Transceiver, and
Cell tables.
You can click Add, Delete, or Properties to add, delete, or modify
a customized field. For parameter description, see 10.17.2
Parameters for Setting Custom Fields.
Hide Columns Hides the currently selected column. After performing this
operation, you can use the Display Columns function to show the
column again.
TIP
You can click a column title to select the column.
Name Description
Sort Ascending Sorts table data in the selected column in ascending order.
Sort Descending Sorts table data in the selected column in descending order.
NOTE
The system saves the current table settings while saving the project, for example, display order of
columns, row height, and column width.
----End
Procedure
l Display a docked window.
If you want to display a docked window, select Window > Name of the docked
window.
If you do not want to display a docked window, deselect Window > Name of the docked
window.
l Hide a docked window.
When a docked window is not active, you can click at the upper right corner of the
window to hide it at the window border. When you place the pointer at the corresponding
position of the window border, the system automatically displays the docked window.
When you move the pointer away, the system automatically hides the docked window.
To undo the operation of hiding a docked window, you can click at the upper right
corner of the window. Then, the hidden docked window is displayed.
l Float a docked window.
Double-click the title bar of the docked window. The docked window moves away from
the dock area and floats over the workspace. If you double-click the title bar again, the
docked window returns to the previous dock area.
You can move a docked window by clicking or moving the title bar.
----End
Context
The Explorer window provides the following sections:
For details about each section, see 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net. This section describes only
the basic operations of the Explorer window.
Procedure
l Switch to a specific section in the Explorer window.
Click a tab in the Explorer window to switch to the corresponding section. For example,
to display the Data section, click the Data tab.
l Expand or collapse a section in the Explorer window.
The objects are organized in the form of nodes in each section. Any section that contains
one or more object nodes has an expand button ( ) or a collapse button ( ) next to the
section name. To expand a section, click next to the section name.
l Display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding node
in the navigation tree of the Explorer window.
You can display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding
node in the navigation tree of the Explorer window. You can deselect the node
corresponding to an object to hide this object on the map. In this way, another object can
be clearly displayed on the map. For example, you can hide all the prediction results except
one prediction result. In this way, the reserved prediction result can be clearly displayed.
The following description takes the hiding of one object as an example to explain this
operation. Click a tab in the Explorer window and then deselect an object under the tab.
The deselected object is hidden and will not be displayed in the map window.
NOTE
l The hidden object is not displayed in the map window, but is still considered during calculation.
l You can hide all the contents under a node by deselecting the node name. If the check box next to a
node is displayed as , it indicates that certain objects are displayed and certain objects are hidden
under this node.
----End
Context
The method for setting the display style of the Site is similar to that of the Transceiver. This
section takes setting the display style of the Transceiver as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 3 Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. The Display Field dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the display style. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.4 Parameters for Setting
NE Display Properties.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
All the NEs in the project are displayed in the map window according to the preset display style.
Procedure
l Search a site or a cell by using the toolbar.
1. On the toolbar, choose Edit > Find. Then, select an NE type from the Find drop-down
list box, as shown in Figure 10-4.
2. Type the NE name in the Name text box, as shown in Figure 10-5.
3. Click Enter.
For details, see 10.17.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations.
5. Click Find.
The search result is displayed in the Result area and the statistical result is displayed
in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click Geometry to locate the selected cell in the map window.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Export base station data.
In the Find Transceiver dialog box, click Export to export data of the located base station.
For detailed operations, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
l Delete a transceiver.
Select the transceiver to be deleted in the Result area and click Delete.
l View transceiver data.
Click Open in the Find Transceiver dialog box to view transceiver parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a grouping mode.
If... Then...
Step 5 Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcut menu.
The system automatically groups cells or sites based on the selected grouping mode.
4. In the GroupBy Config dialog box, select the customized grouping mode that needs to be
displayed when you choose Group By from the shortcut menu.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
You can right-click Site and choose Group By > Grouping Mode to set secondary grouping modes.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the grouping is complete, view the grouping result.
Site groups are displayed based the grouping mode under the Site node in the navigation tree.
Prerequisites
The value of Hexagon Radius for the transmitter is not empty during site deployment or
engineering parameter import.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar. The cell cellular grid is displayed in the map window, as shown in
Figure 10-7.
l After the transmitter location is changed, the cellular grid also moves to the new location.
l After the transmitter is deactivated or deleted, the cellular grid of the transmitter disappears.
Step 2 Click again. The cellular grid in the map window disappears.
NOTE
The Hexagon Radius(m) attribute of the transmitter determines the size of the hexagon cellular grid. After
the value of Hexagon Radius(m) is changed, the size of the hexagon cellular grid on the map is also
changed.
----End
On the U-Net, the visible objects (such as sites, cells, prediction results, and capacity simulation
results) on the Data tab page are more clearly displayed than the visible objects on the Geo tab
page.
You are advised to arrange layers on the Geo tab page in the following sequence from top to
bottom. Thus, the vector layer can be clearly printed.
l Points (vector)
l Highways and lines (vector)
l Geographic data about clutter classes (transparent grid)
l Satellite maps or geographic data about clutter heights (non-transparent)
NOTE
For the methods of selecting display objects and setting the display sequence, see 10.6 Setting Layer Display
Properties. For the methods of setting the color, transparency, and shading effect, see 3.3.5 Setting Display
Parameters of Geographic Data.
Context
Before printing a map, you can set print properties and preview the print effect.
l You can print either an entire map or a part of a map.
l You can use the default print layout or change it as required.
Print layout involves setting the scaling, selecting the ruler, legend, and area, adding a title
or mark, and setting the size, source, orientation, and margin of the paper.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the print layout.
1. Choose File > Print Setting. The Print Setting dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the target print template in the Print Template area.
For detailed operations on print templates, see 10.15.3 Customizing a Print Template.
3. Set print properties in the Print Setting area.
For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print
Properties.
4. Preview the print effect in the Preview area.
Step 2 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Printer to set the printer, print area, and the number of
copies to print.
You can select a PDF printer to print the map as a .pdf file.
Step 3 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Print or choose File > Print to print.
The U-Net supports printing a map into several pages. When the size of the map exceeds the
paper size, the system automatically prints it into several pages.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Export the print template
After setting the print layout, click Export in the Print Setting dialog box to export the
print properties of the selected print template as a .cfg configuration file for future use.
l Import the print template
Click Import to import the print template.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Print Setting. The PrintSetting dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click Add to create a print template.
The system automatically creates a print template with the default setting in the Print
Template area.
Step 3 Modify the properties of the new print template.
For details, see 10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties.
Step 4 Optional: Click Export to export the parameters of the selected template into a .cfg
configuration file for future use.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Delete a print template.
You can click Delete to delete a selected template. However, you cannot delete the last
template.
l Import a print template.
1. Click Import. The Open dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the configuration file (in .cfg format) of the print template.
3. Click Open.
NOTE
If the name of the print template to be imported is the same as that of an existing template, the system
displays a prompt asking you whether to overwrite the existing template.
Prerequisites
l The geographic data is imported.
l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
Context
l Currently, the U-Net supports only the DT data in .txt, .xls and .csv files exported by using
the GENEX Probe.
l For CDMA networks, the U-Net does not support the functions such as importing and
filtering DT data.
l DT data is classified into two types: Drive Test and CW Measurement.
l This section describes how to import CW Measurement data. The method of importing
Drive Test data is similar to that of importing CW Measurement data.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file format and the file to be imported.
l Import Drive Test data. For parameter description, see 10.17.7 Parameters for Importing
Drive Test Data.
l Import CW data. For parameter description, see 10.17.8 Parameters for Importing CW
Measurement Data.
Step 7 Click Import to start importing DT data.
l In the process of data importing, the system displays prompts in the Event Viewer window.
In this case, pay attention to the prompts.
l After the data import is complete, the DT data file is displayed under the CW
Measurement > Sitex_x node on the navigation tree.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l View and edit a DT site.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose Open
Table from the shortcut menu. In the displayed table, you can view and edit DT site
properties or delete a single DT site. For parameter description, see 10.17.9 Parameters
for Viewing DT Point Information.
l Delete a DT file.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose
Delete from the shortcut menu.
l Move a DT site in the map window.
You can directly select a DT site in the map window and then drag it.
l Set the display effect of a DT site.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement. Choose Display Setting from the
shortcut menu.
For parameter description, see 10.17.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties
of DT Points.
Prerequisites
l The geographic data is imported.
l The DT data is imported.
l This section describes how to filter CW Measurement data. The method of filtering Drive
Test data is similar to that of filtering CW Measurement data.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
Step 3 Choose Filter from the shortcut menu. The Filter dialog box is displayed.
For details about the parameters, see 10.17.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data.
If you select this option, the system deletes the information about the DT points that are filtered
out; if you do not select this option, the system just hides the information about the DT points
that are filtered out in the filtering results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the filtering, you can view the filtering results.
1. In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
2. Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.
3. Check the filtering results.
Prerequisites
1. The geographic data has been imported.
2. The DT data has been imported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 On the displayed Data tab page, choose Drive Test > DT data file in the navigation tree.
NOTE
The U-Net can filter DT data that is exported to a file in .txt, .xls, or .csv format using the GENEX Probe.
Step 3 Right-click the selected DT file and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The DT data
window is displayed.
Step 4 You can perform the following operations as required.
If... Then...
You want to view the data of a cell In the DT data window, right-click a cell
whose data needs to be viewed and choose
Filter by Selection from the shortcut menu.
The data of only the selected cell is displayed
in the DT data window.
You want to view the data of other cells In the DT data window, right-click the cell
except for the selected cell whose data does not need to be viewed and
choose Filter Excluding Selection from the
shortcut menu. The data of all cells except for
the selected cell is displayed in the DT data
window.
You want to view the data of one or more cells 1. Select the cells that need to be displayed
from the Serving Cell drop-down list box
in the DT data window.
2. Click OK. The data of the selected cells is
displayed in the DT data window.
NOTE
You can right-click in the DT data window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu to remove
the filter effect.
----End
Prerequisites
The CW Measurement data is imported.
Context
The purpose of propagation model calibration is to optimize the coefficients of a propagation
model by using the actual CW measurement data. The current U-Net supports propagation
calibration based on the CW measurement data only.
The common counters for analyzing the calibration results are as follows:
l Average error: Average value of the prediction error.
l Standard deviation: Mean square of the difference between the prediction error and the
average error.
l Correlation coefficient: indicates the correlation between the actual CW measurement data
and the data calculated by the propagation model.
Prediction error indicates the error between the CW measurement data and the data calculated
by the propagation model.
If the standard deviation and average error of the calibration result are small, it indicates that the
calibrated propagation model matches the actual environment.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 3 Choose Automatically Calibrate from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Form dialog box is
displayed.
Step 5 Select the CW file for propagation model calibration in Select Measurement File.
Step 6 Set the parameters for calibrating the propagation model in Calibrate Limitation.
l Selecting (clearing)Losses Per Clutter indicates whether the impact of the clutter factor is
considered.
If this option is selected, the loss of each clutter class is calibrated.
l Set the standard deviation in Standard Deviation. The default value is 8 dB.
Usually, the value of this parameter is set to 8 dB in the case of flat areas and to 11 dB in the
case of hilly areas.
l Set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability. The default value
is 75%.
If... Then...
The calibrated propagation model meets Click Commit to make the calibration results
your requirements take effect.
The calibrated propagation model does not Click Next to select other coefficients for
meet your requirements calibration until you obtain the desired
propagation model.
The calibration operations are the same as
Step 7 to Step 9.
----End
Prerequisites
The CW measurement or Drive Test data has been imported.
NOTE
If you need to check the calibration effect of the propagation model, the following prerequisites must be met:
l The propagation model has been calibrated.
l The calibration of the propagation model has taken effect.
Context
This section uses the CW measurement data as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
----End
Export Sites Indicates the base stations to be displayed. The default value is
You can select all the base stations in the Full Map.
entire map or the base stations in a selected
polygon. You can also select only a specified
base station.
Transceiver Radius Indicates the radius of cell icons in Google The value range is
Earth. from 1 to 1,000 and
the unit is meter.
The default value is
50.
Group This parameter is not in use. You do not need to set it.
Size If Text is selected as the data type, the Size box is available, where you
can set the text length.
The value range is from 1 to 300.
If you select other data types, the Size box is unavailable.
Parameter Description
Available Fields Lists the parameters that can be displayed in the map window.
Parameter Description
Selected Fields Lists the selected parameters. The selected parameters are
displayed in the map window.
You can select the parameters to be displayed in the map
window by using >, >>, <, and << buttons.
Parameter Description
Indicates the legend cell. Double-click the legend cell. In the displayed Display dialog
For example, box, set parameters such as the NE display color.
Parameters in the Display dialog box describes the
parameters.
Parameter Description
Selected Color Indicates the display color of the selected base stations or
transceivers.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Configuration File Indicates a configuration file template. Users can save the
specified export fields as a template and import this template
in the future by loading.
l Save: saves a template.
l Load: loads a template.
Exported Fields Displays the fields to be exported to the station data file.
Parameter Description
1st. Data Row Indicates the starting row of the data for import. Data in this
row and the subsequent rows is imported.
Update Records Indicates whether to overwrite the existing data in the project.
For example, a site with Site Name set to xxx exists in the U-
Net. A site with Site Name set to xxx also exists in the file to
be imported. If you select Update Records, the parameters
related to the site xxx will be updated.
Parameter Description
Print Template area The existing print templates are listed in this area.
Parameter Description
Hea Logo1 and Logo2 Indicates whether to add logos. you can add two logos at most.
der/ l Position: indicates the position of the selected object.
Foot
er l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is
tab displayed on the map.
page You can click Properties to set the size of the logo. The size unit
is millimeter. You can also click File to select the file that
contains the logo.
Parameter Description
NOTE
The default values of the preceding parameters vary with the templates.
Configuration File Indicates the path of a l Click Save to save the current field
configuration file. mapping information as a
A configuration file saves configuration file.
the field mapping l Click Load to import an existing
information. configuration file. Then, the U-Net
can use the existing field mapping
information.
1st. Data Row Indicates the starting row of In normal cases, the first row in the
the data for import. Data in imported file is a title. Therefore,
this row and the subsequent import the file from its second row.
rows is imported.
Receiver Height Height of a receiver. The default value is 2, and the unit is
meter.
Loss Path loss of a receiver. The default value is 0, and the unit is
dB.
Match Mode This parameter is displayed You can select LAC+CI or BCCH
only when Network Type +BSIC for importing the DT data as
is set to GSM. The default required.
value is BCCH+BSIC.
l Select BCCH+BSIC
when DT files are
generated using the
Assistant or Probe, and
BCCH and BSIC in the
source DT files
uniquely identify a
GSM cell.
l Select LAC+CI when
DT files are generated
using the TEMS, and
LAC and CI in the
source DT files
uniquely identify a
GSM cell.
Config Columns When you click Config l The drop-down list box in the
Columns, the Character dialog box contains the field names
Column Mapping Form in the to-be-imported DT file.
dialog box is displayed, in l You can manually set the
which you can set the mappings between the field names
mappings between the field in the U-Net and those in the DT
names in the imported DT file.
file and those in the U-Net.
l Mappings of the Longitude and
Latitude fields must be set
irrespective of the RAT.
l For the LTE network, the Signal
Level and PCI fields are
mandatory in the dialog box. You
must set the mappings between the
two fields and those in the DT file.
Otherwise, DT data cannot be
imported. The PCI field in the
dialog box needs to map the PCI
field in the DT file for the U-Net to
locate cells.
l For the GSM network, the BCCH,
BSIC, and Signal Level fields are
mandatory in the dialog box. You
must set the mappings between the
three fields and those in the DT
file. Otherwise, DT data cannot be
imported. The BCCH field in the
dialog box needs to map the
BCCH field in the DT file for the
U-Net to locate the ARFCNs in the
DT file, and the BSIC field in the
dialog box needs to map the
BSIC field in the DT file for the U-
Net to locate cells.
l For the UMTS network, the Signal
Level and Scrambling Code
fields are mandatory in the dialog
box. You must set the mappings
between the two fields and those in
the DT file. Otherwise, DT data
cannot be imported. The
Scrambling Code field in the U-
Net needs to map the Scrambling
Code field in the DT file for the U-
Net to locate cells.
l The U-Net automatically places
the DT data under the
Field Source Indicates the fields of the The system automatically matches the
Mapping file to be imported. fields in the DT data with the fields
provided by the U-Net. If a field in the
Destinati Indicates the existing fields DT data file does not match any field
on that match the fields of the in the U-Net, IGNORE is displayed. If
file to be imported. a field in the DT data file matches a
field in the U-Net, the field name in
the U-Net is displayed.
Configuration File Indicates the path of a l Click Save to save the current field
configuration file. mapping information as a
A configuration file saves configuration file.
the field mapping l Click Load to import an existing
information. configuration file. Then, the U-Net
can use the existing field mapping
information.
1st. Data Row Indicates the starting row In normal cases, the first row in the
of the data for import. Data imported file is a title. Therefore,
in this row and the import the file from its second row.
subsequent rows is
imported.
Receiver Height Height of a receiver. The default value is 2, and the unit is
meter.
Loss Path loss of a receiver. The default value is 0, and the unit is
dB.
Field Source Indicates the fields of the l The system automatically matches
Mapping file to be imported. the fields in the file to be imported
with the fields provided by the U-
Net. If a field in the file to be
imported does not match any field
in the U-Net, IGNORE is
displayed. If a field in the file to be
imported matches a field in the U-
Net, the field name in the U-Net is
displayed.
Parameter Description
Serving cell Indicates the cell where the drive test point is located.
The parameter exists only in the drive test data.
Distance(m) Indicates the distance from a DT point to the transceiver that the
DT point belongs to.
Parameter Description
Error(P-M)(dB) Indicates the difference between the measured value and the
calculated value.
(1) Calibration result counter This area lists the statistical counters of calibration
area results.
l Average indicates the average error of the
calibration.
l Standard Deviation indicates the standard
deviation of the calibration.
l Cor.Coeff.: Indicates the correlation coefficient.
If the correlation coefficient is greater, you can
infer that the DT data is close to the calculation
results of the propagation model. The value range
is from 0 to 1.
l RMS: Indicates the root mean square of the
calibration.
(2) Calibration result table This area lists the coefficient values before and after
area the calibration.
If a coefficient value changes after the calibration,
this coefficient is marked in blue.
(3) Calibration result chart This area directly displays the propagation model
area calibration results in a coordinate chart.
l The x-coordinate indicates the propagation
distance.
l The y-coordinate indicates the path loss value.
l Data in red indicates the actual path loss value,
which is obtained on the basis of the DT data or
CW data.
l Data in green indicates the path loss value
calculated by the propagation model before the
calibration.
l Data in blue indicates the path loss value
calculated by the propagation model after the
calibration.
(4) Button area This area provides two buttons, with which you can
make the calibration results take effect and perform
further calibration.
NOTE
Azimuth Start Azimuth Indicates the start value of The unit is degree. The
area, where the azimuth interval. value must be an integer.
data is
filtered End Azimuth Indicates the end value of The unit is degree. The
according to the azimuth interval. value must be an integer.
the cell Add Adds an azimuth interval. -
azimuth
Azimuth List Lists all azimuth intervals. -
Clutter area, Indicates all the You can select the clutter By default, all clutter classes
where data clutter classes in classes through the check are selected.
is filtered the geographic boxes.
according to data. The DT data related to the
the clutter selected clutter class is not
class. filtered out.
Color Indicates the color for highlighting a field within a certain value
range.
This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net.
CM Cubic Metric
CW Continuous Wave
DL Downlink
DT Drive Test
HO Handover
HR Half Rate
IP Internet Protocol
NF Noise Figure
PN Pseudo-Noise
RA Random Access
RB Resource Block
RE Resource Element
TA Tracking Area
TS Timeslot
UE User Equipment
UL Uplink
ZC Zadoff-Chu Sequence